Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
Release 4.1
July 2011
RAM International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92010
Telephone: (760) 431-3610
Toll Free: (800) 726-7789
Fax: (760) 431-5214
DAA037480-1/0001
DISCLAIMER
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are protected by both United States copyright law
and international treaty provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is strictly prohibited and subject to civil and
criminal penalties. Please refer to the License Agreement for authorization to make a backup copy of the software. You may
not sell this software or documentation or give copies of them away to anyone else.
Except as expressly warranted in the License Agreement, RAM International disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied,
including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the
software, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. All results should be verified to the user's
satisfaction. The contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors and may be
revised without prior notice.
DAA037480-1/0001
RAM Concept
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
. . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .5
3 Understanding Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Managing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Using plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Creating new plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Viewing perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Creating new perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Controlling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7 Choosing Units
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RAM Concept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
10 Specifying Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RAM Concept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
20 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
About self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Point load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Drawing point loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Line load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Drawing line loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Area load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
RAM Concept
iii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
RAM Concept
26.12
26.13
26.14
26.15
26.16
26.17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
RAM Concept
34 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
34.7
34.8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
vi
Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Load History Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
RAM Concept
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
RAM Concept
vii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
50 Analysis Notes
50.1
50.2
50.3
50.4
50.5
50.6
50.7
50.8
50.9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.2 Tributary Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.3 Influence Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
52.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
52.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
52.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
52.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
52.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52.9 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52.10 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52.11 National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52.12 Mat Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
52.13 Special Member Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
viii
RAM Concept
ix
61.4
61.5
61.6
61.7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1 Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses
the finite element method for elevated concrete floor
systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be
post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC), or
hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). Concept is extremely
powerful and allows you to design an entire floor in one
model, or design individual strips or beams.
In this context, the term design means that:
The user defines the following: structural geometry,
loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if
applicable).
Concept calculates (for any number of load combinations): the required amount of reinforcement for flexure
and one-way shear according to relevant code requirements; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for punching
shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections.
A model consists of anything from a single simply
supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are
three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip
Wizard).
Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to
replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and with the
Strip Wizard interface.
RAM Concept
Chapter 1
Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for
the following:
deep beams using the strut and tie method
I-shaped sections
ramps
concrete sections with internal voids or cells
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number
of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do this for
evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly
relevant.
Chapter 1
These chapters discuss the following code specific issues:
default loadings
default load combinations
live load reduction
assumptions on material behavior
rule selection
rule implementation
In particular, you should review what rules are used and
how the authors interpret and implement the rules.
RAM Concept
www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager
Chapter 1
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
OK.
Figure 2-1 A.Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar contains the set of menus for the program. Includes the File, Edit, Criteria,
Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action
Tools for manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coordinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for editing the active
plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window.
G. Report Contents Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report
sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program status information. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the
current cursor location in plan coordinates.
1 Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been
RAM Concept
3 Type a name for your file and click Save. Concept adds
the filename extension .cpt if not provided.
To save any open file:
1 Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file,
Chapter 2
Figure 2-2 Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the
Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
RAM Concept
Chapter 2
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
3 Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab
areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up
the structural model. Since there are so many objects
involved in modeling a structure, Concept uses layers to
organize these objects.
RAM Concept
Chapter 3
Tendon Parameters Layers (Latitude and Longitude)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design
results.
Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, other
codesuse some different terminology.
Load History Deflection Layers
10
Figure 3-1 Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following
layers: Mesh Input, Element, Design Strip, Reinforcement
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel
Projection (
) and Perspective Projection (
) toggles
control which way the image is rendered. One, and only
one, of these toggles is always set.
) and the
) or the
).
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
RAM Concept
11
Chapter 4
panning allow you to change what portion of the model you
are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the view
automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use
the Redraw command (
screen.
4.5.3 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs
that invalidates the current view. When you generate the
mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open
windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM Concept
automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view
is not up to date, click Redraw (
in the active window.
Zoom In (
) magnify the
Previous (
).
).
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
12
RAM Concept
Chapter 4
appearance schemes as you need to customize the look of
your plans and perspectives. When you create a new plan
or perspective, the window initially uses the default
scheme.
You can select the color of every drawn object type for
each appearance scheme. You can also set the background,
grid and highlight colors. If an object type has no color
selected (
), RAM Concept uses the color setting for the
objects layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object
color to no selection, and then set the Latitude Tendon layer
to red and Longitude Tendon layer color to blue. RAM
Concept uses the foreground color in the case that you have
selected neither the object type color nor the layer default
color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme:
).
a color.
).
3 Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Appearance command.
To create a new appearance scheme:
).
dialog.
3 Type a name for the new scheme and select the base
).
) or Shrink Fonts (
).
highlighted scheme.
).
You can select the font scale so that the font size either
changes or stays unchanged as you zoom in and out on a
plan.
To set the font scale:
).
13
Chapter 4
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
OK.
14
RAM Concept
Chapter 5
) snaps perpendicularly
Snap Extension (
) does not create a snapping mode
by itself, but it affects the behavior of some of the other
snap settings.
RAM Concept
15
Chapter 5
To enter coordinates:
2 Hold down the Shift key as you fence the objects in the
selection you want to deselect. This deselects the selected
objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects
any objects in the rectangular area not previously selected.
).
).
2 Hold down the Shift key as you double click on the object
).
).
the Shift key as you click to add the object to the current
selection). When you are selecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
2 Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from
1 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
Chapter 5
the Move tool (
), Stretch tool (
), Rotate tool (
or Mirror tool (
). See Moving, rotating, stretching, and
mirroring objects on page 17 for more information.
), Stretch tool (
), Rotate tool (
or Mirror tool (
) (See Selecting objects). If you hold
down the Shift key on the first click of a move, rotate, or
mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the
selection rather then the selection itself.
To move a selection:
).
).
of the snap area until you see the move cross cursor (
)
then click. (Hold down the Shift key as you click to move a
copy of the selection.)
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group
of objects, to move.
3 Enter the point from which to move (hold down the Shift
of objects, to move.
).
).
half of the snap area until you see the stretch cursor (
then click.
of objects, to stretch.
of objects, to stretch.
To rotate a selection:
).
3 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
(
), Mirror tool (
), and Rotate tool (
) except they
affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale the
end angle.
).
).
), and
).
3 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
2 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
RAM Concept
).
17
Chapter 5
3 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to
rotate.
end angle.
).
2 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the model (hold down the Shift key as
you click to mirror a copy of the model).
When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the
specified default properties.
).
), Dimension tool (
(
) are all used to add information to plans. These
objects are not part of the structural model and RAM
Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh
or calculating results. As for all objects, the lines,
dimensions and text objects belong to the layer on which
they are drawn.
To draw a line:
).
2 Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
3 Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
click OK.
).
located.
To draw text:
).
line).
3 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
4 Enter the text and its properties.
18
RAM Concept
Chapter 6
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh
Input layer can be opened by choosing Layers > Mesh
Input > Tables > Walls Below.
mouse button.
The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths
you set will appear the same way on paper.
RAM Concept
19
Chapter 6
20
RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7 Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems:
US, SI and MKS.
Some designers refer to the US units system as US
customary units, and others call it Imperial. SI and
MKS are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather
than weight.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice
should dictate your choice.
RAM Concept
21
Chapter 7
To specify Report as Zero:
22
Note: You can also turn off plotted values such as Fr and
Fs with the plot menu. See Setting the plotted results on
page 159.
RAM Concept
Chapter 8
Positive analysis
Figure 8-2 Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending,
Element Axial, Vertical Deflection. Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal
Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
Figure 8-3 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Positive loads
RAM Concept
23
Chapter 8
Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
24
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
Note: fci and fc are used for all codes except BS8110.
fcui The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at
the time of applying prestress (also known as initial
strength).
fcu The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
Note: fcui and fcu are only used for BS8110 and IS456.
Poissons Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral
strains to axial strains for an axially loaded material. This is
usually 0.2 for concrete.
Ec Calc The method used to calculate Youngs Modulus
(for both initial characteristic strength and characteristic
strength). This can be according to the active code rules or
a specified value.
User Eci The user defined Youngs Modulus used for
initial cross section analysis.
User Ec The user defined Youngs Modulus used for
global analysis, service cross section analysis and strength
design.
9.2.2 PT Systems
RAM Concept
25
Chapter 9
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is
usually comprised of seven wires then the area is more
complicated than d2/4.
Eps The Youngs Modulus of the strand at zero strain.
fse The assumed effective stress in the strand after all
losses. Using jacks overrides this assumption. See About
jacks on page 138 for further information.
fpy The yield stress of the strand.
fpu The ultimate stress of the strand.
Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct.
Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands
in a bonded tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons).
Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that
allows satisfactory placement of tendons in the field. You
should consult with a local PT supplier. A value of zero
disables radius checking for this PT system.
Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction
/ Angular Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term
Losses
Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have
no effect unless tendon jacks are used. See Jack
properties on page 138 of Chapter 26, Defining Tendons
for further information.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new
material and click OK.
26
RAM Concept
Chapter 9
To delete materials:
RAM Concept
27
Chapter 9
28
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10 Specifying Loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a
group.
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You
draw the actual loads on the loading plans.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type,
as described in About loading types below).
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and
you define the factors that control this process in the
loading window.
29
Chapter 10
Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal,
Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
30
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
Most of these loading types are also available in a
transfer variation. See About Transfer Loading Types
on page 31 for more information.
To change an analysis:
31
Chapter 10
Figure 10-3 Load Pattern for maximum negative moment (about Y-Y) at
first interior column.
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the onpattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then
two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the
hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder of the
slab.
Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with
the full loading - to determine the design force envelopes
for design strip segments, design sections and punching
checks.
Figure 10-2 Load Pattern for maximum positive moment (about Y-Y) in
end span
32
RAM Concept
Chapter 10
To approximate moving loads:
factor of zero.
2 Specify load factors (in the load combinations window)
RAM Concept
33
Chapter 10
34
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
them all.
RAM Concept
35
Chapter 11
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
A group load combination has load factors for every nonlateral loading and for one single lateral loading type.
Effectively, a group load combination's results are the
envelope of all the results from N invisible single load
combinations, where N is the number of loadings for the
given lateral loading type.
A linear group load combination has a standard and
alternate load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a
standard and alternate load factor for the selected lateral
loading type. It never has zero tension iterations.
A zero-tension group load combination has a single load
factor for every non-lateral loading, and a single load factor
for the selected lateral loading type. It has zero-tension
iterations as necessary for invisible (internal) component
load combo, and will be the envelope of all of the
component load combos combined. It never considers
pattern loading.
Figure 11-2 is intended to explain the ramifications of load
combination type selection.
36
RAM Concept
Chapter 11
combination, RAM Concept provides a much simpler
solution - Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).
Point Load
Area Load
Single
Lateral Group
Figure 11-3 This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads
(shown). The live loading reduces the positive span moment. By using an
AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combination with a reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live
loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
Figure 11-4 shows the suggested way to use the factors for
a strength design of the ACI318-05 Factored LC.
RAM Concept
37
Chapter 11
Linear
Single
Standard and
Alternate load factors
for every loading
No zero-tension
iterations
Considers pattern
loading
Group
Standard and
Alternate load factors
for every non-lateral
loading
Standard and
Alternate load factors
for the selected lateral
loading type
No zero-tension
iterations
Considers pattern
loading
No results for point
springs, line springs,
point supports, line
supports, walls.
No Standard
results for any
quantity
See Figure 11-2 for
more information.
Zero-tension
Standard load factor
for every loading
Zero-tension iterations as necessary
Ignores pattern
loading
Standard load factor
for every non-lateral
loading
Standard load factor
for the selected lateral
loading type
Zero-tension iterations as necessary
Figure 11-5 Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - six wind loadings have been added (and one stressing dead and three live loadings have
been deleted)
Ignores pattern
loading
No results for point
springs, line springs,
point supports, line
supports, walls.
No Standard
results for any
quantity
See Figure 11-2 for
more information.
Figure 11-6 Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+
0.5Lr + 1.6W
38
RAM Concept
Chapter 12
ments and section status for all rule set design section
envelopes.
Example:
RAM Concept
39
Chapter 12
These rules are applied to the rule set design section
envelopes.
The reinforcement requirements and section status for
all rule set design section envelopes are in turn enveloped
for a design summary.
Ductility Design
Strength Design
40
RAM Concept
Chapter 13
The File Units dialog box will appear with a list of units.
The units relate to the CAD file, not the Concept file.
RAM Concept
41
Chapter 13
42
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
Import Type
Story
Elevated
Mat Foundation
1st
2nd
Table 14-1 Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type,
and the slab area imported.
1 Slabs
2 Beams
RAM Concept
43
Chapter 14
Forces
Imported
Mat
Transfer
Gravity
Fz, Mx, My
Mat
Transfer
Lateral
Elevated
Transfer
Gravity
Fz
Transfer
Lateral
Fz, Mx, My
Elevated
Dead Load
Live
Live Reducible
Live Reducible
Live Unreducible
Live Unreducible
Live Storage
Live Storage
Live Roof
Ignored
Mass Dead
Ignored
Table 14-2 Relationship between the slab type, member loading type, and
imported force components for a slab.
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Structural System will always be reduced during the import. For
this reason you should always choose the live load reduction
code of None in these files.
44
RAM Concept
Chapter 14
import operation.
After an RSS file is imported, a RAM Import Status dialog
box, similar to that shown in Figure 14-3, appears with a
summary and any warnings.
RAM Concept
45
Chapter 14
the loadings that Concept offers to remove. If you want to
export the reactions from these pre-existing loads to RSS,
you need to copy the loads from the original loadings to the
corresponding RSS loadings that are being imported (after
which you should manually delete the non-RSS loadings).
Note: If you have used the Export Geometry to RAM Structural System feature (section 36.2) prior to importing, then
you always see this warning. The recommended workflow is
to either draw the loads in RSS or draw the loads in Concept
after importing from RSS; with either of these workflows,
you can safely allow the loadings proposed for removal to
be deleted.
Dont Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM
Concept file, but not included in the load combinations.
Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.
Chapter 14
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM
Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for import,
then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected
when the file is reimported.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS
file you imported into this RAM Concept file.
2 Select the RSS file and click OK.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties
that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
Beams
RAM Concept
Compressible is true.
Roller is false, except above mat foundations.
Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top
regardless of the setting in the RAM database.
47
Chapter 14
Walls
14.6.3 Assumptions
All loads are applied to the surface of the slab.
Wall forces are applied as a linearly varying force along
the length of the wall that is statically equivalent to the
wall forces and moments.
Refer to Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 for mapping of RAM
load cases and types to RAM Concepts loadings and force
levels.
RAM Concept
Loading
RAM Concept
Loading Force
Level (Limit State)
Wind
Wind
Service *
Seismic
Seismic
Ultimate *
Other
Seismic
Ultimate *
Virtual
Ignored
RSS Load
Case Type
Sub-Type
Wind
Service *
Wind
all others
Service
Seismic
Ultimate *
Seismic
UBC 94
Seismic
Service
Seismic
all others
Seismic
Ultimate
Dynamic
Eigen solution
Ignored
Dynamic
all others
Ignored
Wind
User defined
story forces
Seismic
Center of
rigidity
Ignored
Virtual Work
Ignored
Ultimate *
48
RAM Concept
Chapter 15
The options at the top of the dialog window are the same as
for creating any new Concept file and are not discussed
further here.
created file.
RAM Concept
49
Chapter 15
behave slightly differently due to the operation being an
update. For example if Columns is selected, all
existing columns will be removed and new columns
defined by the STAAD information. If Columns is not
selected, no changes will be made to the columns in the
Concept file.
50
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16.1.1 Purpose
There are two related purposes for ISM:
The transfer of structural information between applications.
The coordination of structural information between
applications.
To provide for transferring information, ISM provides a
means of defining, storing, reading and querying ISM
models.
To provide for coordination of information, ISM can detect
differences between ISM models, allowing you to
selectively update either an ISM repository or an
applications data. This gives you control over the
consistency between the two data sets.
RAM Concept
51
Chapter 16
1 Choose File > Sync ISM > New from repository, as in
Figure 16-2.
click OK.
If the Extended UI checkbox is enabled, the ISM Change
Management environment will be executed, allowing you
to manually inspect and filter the items to be imported.
Update ISM Repository:
16.3.1 Filtering
The ISM model is very general. It can represent diverse
structure types, such as buildings and bridges, and material
types like steel, wood and concrete. Concept filters out any
part of the ISM repository that it does not model or is not
relevant. The Update operations use the filtered model to
determine the context of the changes to be applied.
For example, Concept filters out all steel members. When
Concept updates the ISM repository, it does not need to
replicate steel members in the model. The Change
Management can deduce that Concept is not deleting the
steel members because it never read them in.
The Concept filter retains only the following objects from
the ISM model:
The imported story information
Figure 16-3 New File from ISM Dialog
52
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
Concrete walls and columns that are connected to the
slabs or beams retained
Static Load Cases and their loads that are applied to the
slabs or beams retained
ISM Type(/Use)
N/A
Story
Concrete Mix
Concrete
Slab Area
Surface Member/Slab or
Surface Member Modifier
Slab Opening
Surface Opening
Beam
Curve Member/Beam
Column
Curve Member/Column
Sloped slabs
Wall
Surface Member/Wall
Loading
Load Case
Point Load
Point Load
Line Load
Curve Load
Area Load
Surface Load
N/A
Section
Rebar
Rebar Material
Distributed Rebar
Transverse Rebar
Perpendicular Rebar
Non-horizontal rebar
RAM Concept
53
Chapter 16
surface member and its modifiers define the slab material,
thickness and surface position properties. Modifier
boundaries must lie inside the parent surface member's
boundary. Modifier boundaries may overlap, so modifiers
have an integer priority to determine precedence in
overlapping areas. Modifiers always take precedence over
the parent surface member. Normal practice is for modifier
priorities to be sequential, starting at 1.
A surface member may also contain any number of surface
member openings. Like modifier boundaries, opening
boundaries must lie within the parent surface member's
boundary and may overlap. However, openings always take
precedence over the surface member and its modifiers. In
effect, surface members have an infinitely low priority,
surface member modifiers have an explicit integer priority,
and openings have an infinitely high priority.
54
Chapter 16
Drop Caps and Panels, on the interior or exterior, should
not be modeled by adding openings to a slab and filling
them with other slabs. Instead, increase the priority on the
drop panel slabs so that they override the base slab.
Slab area islands can be handled properly if modeled
with care. A slab area island is completely contained
within, and higher priority than, a slab opening. The slab
opening is contained within or on the edge of, and higher
priority than, another slab area. If the island slab area does
not overlap the outer slab area's effective shape, it will
converted into a separate ISM surface member. The
preferred ISM model is a surface member with an opening
and a modifier. This can be accomplished by splitting the
opening so that it surrounds the island slab without
covering the larger slab. If the Concept slab is constructed
with openings whose priorities are larger than all of the
slab areas, then it will map correctly to the ISM surface
member.
Chapter 16
sections and linearly varying sections. Concept supports
only two section shapes: solid rectangles for beams and
solid rectangles or circles for columns. Concept must
therefore create a rectangular or circular approximation for
any non-rectangular or non-circular ISM section shape.
ISM Parametric Sections use a small number of parameters
to define the most common section shapes. For column
members, Concept maps solid and hollow circular ISM
parametric section shapes to solid circles. All other
parametric shapes for beams and columns are
approximated by rectangles.
Table 16-2 shows the width and height the Concept
rectangular section approximations for each ISM
Parametric Section Type:
Stressing Dead
DeadStructure
Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed
Other Dead
DeadUnspecified
Other Dead
Concept Height
Solid Rectangle
Width
Height
Hollow Rectangle
Width
Height
Solid Circle
Outer Diameter
Outer Diameter
FloorAssembly
Live Unreducible
Hollow Circle
Diameter
Diameter
FloorOffice
Live Reducible
Web Thickness
Depth
FloorResidential
Live Reducible
Web Thickness
Depth
FloorRetail
Live Reducible
Thickness
Depth
FloorStorage
Live Storage
Web Thickness
Depth
FloorUnspecified
Live Reducible
Double L
2*Thickness
Depth
ParkingHeavy
Live Parking
ParkingLight
Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified
Live Parking
56
RoofAccess
Live Roof
RoofRain
Live Roof
RoofSnowDrift
Snow
RoofSnowUniform
Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified
Snow
RoofUnspecified
Live Roof
RAM Concept
Chapter 16
Table 16-6 gives the Concept Loading Type imported for
each ISM Lateral Load Cause.
Table 16-8 defines the ISM Load Cause exported for each
Concept Loading Type.
SeismicService
Seismic Service
Balance
PostTensioning
SeismicUltimate
Seismic Ultimate
Stressing Dead
DeadConstruction
SeismicUnspecified
Seismic Ultimate
Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed
WindService
Wind Service
Live Reducible
FloorUnspecified
WindUltimate
Wind Ultimate
Live Unreducible
FloorAssembly
WindUnspecified
Wind Service
Live Storage
FloorStorage
Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified
Live Roof
RoofAccess
Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified
Other
Other
Wind Service
WindService
Wind Ultimate
WindUltimate
Seismic Service
SeismicService
Seismic Ultimate
SeismicUltimate
EarthPressureService
Other
EarthPressureUltimate
Other
EarthPressureUnspecified
Other
FloorConstruction
Other
FluidContained
Other
FluidUncontained
Other
FluidUnspecified
Other
GroundWaterPressure
Other
Hydrodynamic
Other
Hydrostatic
Other
Ice
Other
Other
Other
PostTensioning
Balance
Settlement
Other
Shrinkage
Other
Thermal
Other
RAM Concept
57
Chapter 16
load is split into smaller polygonal area loads and applied
to the surface members they overlap.
It is possible to create a Concept model in a way that makes
it impossible for Concept to maintain the accuracy of both
the Concept and ISM models. For example, consider a
Concept slab containing an opening and a second slab
inside the hole (an island). Concept maintains the user's
intentions by creating an ISM surface member for each
slab. If there is an area load covering both slabs, Concept
must create an additional area load for the island slab.
However, the larger Concept area load will still cover the
island slab, so the next Update operation would create yet
another area load on the island slab. Instead, Concept does
not create a new area load for the island slab and will leave
the ISM surface member unloaded. The preferred method
for modeling this configuration is to split up the larger area
load so that it does not overlap the island slab.
16.3.9 Rebar
Exporting Concept Rebar to ISM
16.3.10 Options
Options controlling the ISM operations are set by choosing
File > Sync ISM > Options. See Figure 16-4.
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
RAM Concept
59
Chapter 17
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and
y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and yaxes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the zdirection according to Hookes law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce
results that are more accurate.
Thickness
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
To draw a column:
).
The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that
it uses a line rather than a point. A wall can pass through a
column, or intersect another wall.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
).
60
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
).
Be very careful about specifying anything but Fixed in zdirection for point supports and Translation in z-direction
fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch /
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab
translation along or across the support could result in arch /
membrane action.
RAM Concept
61
Chapter 17
only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent
post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
).
).
62
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local s-axis at each end.
).
Figure 17-2 Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units
at the first three corners. For quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth
corner value.
).
RAM Concept
63
Chapter 17
3 Close the polygon by typing c in the command line or
Figure 17-3 Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input
Standard Plan
Figure 17-4 The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from
Figure 17-3.
64
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area
properties:
No-torsion 2-way slab The slab behaves like a twoway slab, except that it has only minimal torsional
stiffness (Mrs).
Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic
slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values
are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In
general, we do not recommend using this option.
Refer to Orthotropic behavior on page 372 for further
information on the use of Behavior properties.
).
RAM Concept
65
Chapter 17
).
66
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 17
2 Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into
position.
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
RAM Concept
).
67
Chapter 17
68
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
box.
).
3 Click Generate.
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size
of the floor and the specified mesh element size. For most
models, the mesh generates in less than 15 seconds.
RAM Concept
69
Chapter 18
should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satisfactory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs
the elements is effectively random.
70
RAM Concept
Chapter 18
Figure 18-4 Point support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked.
Figure 18-5 Line support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked
Figure 18-6 Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementation of line supports to refine the mesh.
RAM Concept
71
Chapter 18
72
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and yaxes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the zdirection according to Hookes law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce
results that are more accurate.
).
RAM Concept
73
Chapter 19
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column
elements in the same location as the original column
elements. The pasted column elements are the active
selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from below to
).
).
74
Chapter 19
fixed for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch /
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab
translation along or across the support could result in arch /
membrane action.
).
).
).
RAM Concept
75
Chapter 19
).
).
).
76
RAM Concept
Chapter 19
the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using
different surface elevations for different areas.
) and Poly
) share the same button on the
) tool.
) tool.
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
RAM Concept
).
consecutively.
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
) or
77
Chapter 19
78
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20 Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area
loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be
in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the
moments can be about the global x- and y-axes.
).
command line).
RAM Concept
79
Chapter 20
Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end
(horizontal force).
The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool
except that it uses two points rather than one point.
).
).
80
RAM Concept
Chapter 20
My Area moment about the global y-axis.
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any
direction. The area force variation could be for snowdrift,
or sloping soil.
Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to
enter three values, separated by commas (vertices 1, 2 and
3). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment)
in two directions. See Figure 20-2.
Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept calculates the unique value at all vertices (three points define a
plane).
).
2 Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordi-
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simultaneously.
RAM Concept
81
Chapter 20
82
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
).
RAM Concept
83
Chapter 21
Load pattern for four-panel slab
Figure 21-2 To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this
load pattern.
Figure 21-4 With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and
there will be less additional area load in the pattern loading.
Figure 21-3 The point load and some additional area load will be included
in the pattern loading.
Figure 21-5 This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that
closely resembles the load pattern.
84
RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See
Chapter 18, Generating the Mesh for more information
on improving the mesh.
RAM Concept
85
Chapter 21
86
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
three Span Segment Strips (left, center and right). These are
known as design strips.
See Figure 22-1 for further explanation.
RAM Concept
87
Chapter 22
maximum division spacing
support width
changes in concrete section along the span
Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of
each division, plus one at the end. The length of each cross
section equals the width of the design strip at that location.
See Figure 22-2.
Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design
strip cross section according to the cross section trimming
and inter cross section slope limit settings.
Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination
along the length of each design strip cross section (and
hence across the width of the design strip). See Figure 223.
Concept uses some properties of each span segment to
determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, posttensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip.
Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load
combination integrals within a rule set. Other span segment
properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the
actual code rule calculations. See Span segment
properties on page 90 for more information.
Figure 22-2 Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span
with cross sections visible.
Figure 22-3 Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross section of three design strips.
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
AND / OR
EITHER
(manually)
Continue
Figure 22-4 Flow diagram of the design strip process
RAM Concept
89
Chapter 22
Span Set Determines the set the span segment belongs to:
latitude or longitude.
Environment The environment setting affects which
service rules Concept selects in some codes.
Refer to the appropriate code discussion chapter for more
information:
Section 55.5.4 on page 444 and Section 55.6.10 on
page 450 for relevance to ACI318-02.
Section 59.6.15 on page 528 for relevance to AS3600.
Section 60.5.4 on page 539 for relevance to BS8110.
Section 61.5.4 on page 561 for relevance to IS 456.
Section 62.5 on page 561 for relevance to EC2.
Section 63.5 on page 605 for relevance to CSA A23.3.
90
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Span Width Calc This determines how Concept
calculates the span width.
The choices are:
the web with plus 0.07 times the span length plus
0.2 times the overhanging flange width on either
side, not to exceed 0.14 times the span length (EC2
only)
91
Chapter 22
the presence of supports at ends of span segments and
overrides Consider End as Support and Support
Width.
where the span spine is near the slab edge and pulls
back the closest cross section by x, where x is the bar
end cover plus 1 inch / 25 mm.
This is done by setting the support width to x.
If the spine end near the slab edge has detected a
support, then the slab edge detection is NOT
performed (and the regular support width calcs are
used).
Consider End 1 as Support These checkboxes allow
Concept to determine your interpretation of spans in the
structure. This determination of spans affects how Concept
applies code rules that are span-related, including
determining support regions, span regions and areas used in
live load reduction.
Support Width at End 1 The dimension of the support
parallel to the design strip. The support width determines
where the first and last design strip cross sections are
located. Their locations are at half the support width
(measured in the direction of the span) from the ends of the
design strip. This is to facilitate reduction of moments to
face of supports (it is thus important to start and end design
strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to enter
the support width as zero.
92
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack
width limit wmax to use when designing for Eurocode 2
clause 7.3. When Code is selected the values in UK
National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
RAM Concept
93
Chapter 22
User specified LLR parameters See Chapter 52, Live
Load Reduction Notes for information on Concepts
implementation of live load reduction.
).
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box appears.
).
Generate Strips.
94
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Concept recalculates the span segment strips for the
selected span segments.
Example 22-1
Figures 22-10 through 22-12 show the use of span
boundaries to control the span segment width.
Figure 22-13 shows an alternative.
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
RAM Concept
95
Chapter 22
Figure 22-11 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 22-10.
One span has some illogical design strips because the calculated span
width is excessive.
Figure 22-13 The same span segment strips with the cross sections oriented to ninety degrees. This did not require manual span boundaries.
).
defined.
Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths.
You can choose to accept the column strip widths that
Concept calculates, or make some modifications.
BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 states the following:
Columns strips between unlike panels: Where there is a
support common to two panels of such dimensions that the
strips in one panel do not match those in the other, the
division of the panels over the region of the common
support should be taken as that calculated for the panel
giving the wider column strip.
The column strips in the following example are modified
with logic derived from this clause.
96
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Example 22-2
Figures 22-14 through 22-16 show the use of strip
boundaries to control the column strip width
Figure 22-15 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 22-14.
RAM Concept
97
Chapter 22
Figure 22-20 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Example 22-4
Figure 22-18 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 22-17.
One span (with gray shading) has illogical span width and column strip
width.
Figure 22-19 Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the
column strip width is still a problem.
98
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-22 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 22-21.
Figure 22-23 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
RAM Concept
99
Chapter 22
considers this core to be the same as a single core with the
same (total) width.
Figure 22-26 Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow
shear core slivers often result in shear reinforcement and design failure.
Perspective
Figure 22-27 Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross section not in the shear core are a different color.
Figure 22-25 One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with
zero shear core.
100
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
elevations.
Figure 22-28 Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core
(right).
Figure 22-32 Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear
core (right).
Figure 22-33 Max Shear Core trimming showing revised section (left)
and shear core (right).
RAM Concept
101
Chapter 22
t1
t2
span direction
span direction
Figure 22-36 Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the
full depth for all cross-section design.
102
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
These include:
1 Skew angles: whether latitude and longitude design strips
RAM Concept
103
Chapter 22
Figure 22-40 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross sections (shown in Figure 22-41)
are parallel to those of adjacent spans
Figure 22-42 A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The
latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the longitude tendons.
104
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-48 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
RAM Concept
105
Chapter 22
Example 22-6 Full panel design strips for an irregular grid
(ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)
Figure 22-50 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span
Cross Section tool.
Figure 22-52 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 22-53 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.
106
RAM Concept
Chapter 22
Figure 22-57 Regenerated design strips after using the Orient Span
Cross Section tool.
Figure 22-55 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering
Figure 22-58 Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
RAM Concept
107
Chapter 22
For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for
RC. As such, you should use multiple design strip
segments in one span.
Figure 22-59 shows two examples of a slab with tendons
stopping either side of a pour strip (in gray).
On the left, span segment 2-1 has been generated and
extends from support to support. This means that the entire
segment is designed according to the Consider as PostTensioned option. If the option is checked, then the pour
strip design is wrong.
On the right, span segments 1-1, 1-2(2) and 1-1 (3) have
been drawn manually. The Consider End x as Support
options have been unchecked, and support widths set to
zero, where end x is at the pour strip.
The Consider as Post-Tensioned option is checked for 11 and 1-1(3), but not 1-1(2). The pour strip is thus designed
as reinforced, not post-tensioned, concrete. Concept
designs the PT span segments for service stress rules and
checks initial stresses, but not the RC areas.
108
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
RAM Concept
109
Chapter 23
Strip Type (Eurocode 2 only) Determines the type of
strip defined by this design section.
Col. Strip (Full Width): Use design rules for full bay width
cross sections (generally used without middle strips).
Col. Strip (w/ Mid. Strips): Use design rules for partial bay
width column strips (generally used in conjunction with
middle strips).
Middle Strip: Use design rules for partial bay width middle
strips (generally used in conjunction with column strips).
CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The
service design type for members defined as PT for the
design strip.
).
110
Figure 23-3 Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flexure.
RAM Concept
Chapter 23
Example 2
Figure 23-6 Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
Figure 23-7 Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for
slab bending. Ignore depth should be used for the design sections to utilize
a shallower section.
Figure 23-8 Using ignore depth to locate reinforcement bars at the correct
elevation.
Figure 23-5 Slab bending moments
RAM Concept
111
Chapter 23
that these tools perform, so you can determine the
appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under
112
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
24.2.1 General
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the
area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations.
The analysis is conservative when you set a very large
radius, but this has two detrimental effects: Concept will
need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer
to check that punching location. More importantly,
Concept will consider slab openings that are far from the
column in determining the potentially critical section that
may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from
the slab depth in each region to determine the effective
depth for critical section calculations.
For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d
distance.
If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified
Cover to CGS, the region is treated as a hole.
RAM Concept
Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis.
Number of Desired Sections per Zone A zone can be
envisioned as a region outside a column, drop cap, beam,
etc. A column connection in a simple plate will have only
one zone. A column connection with a drop cap will have
multiple zones. This property enables Concept to determine
how many sections you want to generate in each of these
zones.
This property can be used to eliminate unwanted sections,
but caution should be used when reducing the desired
number of sections. The sections generated are based upon
the minimum critical section cross-sectional area, and they
are not actually analyzed until after they are generated. By
setting this value to 1 you would be likely to get only the
most critical section in each zone but this is not guaranteed.
Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept
treats edges and openings.
An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative.
For columns near a slab edge, however, the Sector Voids
setting stops the critical section before it reaches the slab
edge (at a ray from the column center to the slab edge that
has a length equal to the search radius).
An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces
better results for critical sections at edge and corner
locations. This setting, however, requires you to review the
results more carefully to ensure that Concept has checked
all the appropriate sections.
An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally
unconservative. You may want to try this setting to see if
Concept finds a critical section that it missed with the other
settings.
Connection Type This determines which column
classification Concept uses for calculating allowable
stresses.
A Corner type uses corner column rules (post-tensioning is
ignored).
An Edge type uses edge column rules (post-tensioning is
ignored).
An Interior type uses interior column rules (Concept
considers the section as post-tensioned if the P/A exceeds
125 psi).
An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge or
interior type based upon the total void angle around it. If
the void angle is less than 90 degrees then the column is an
interior type. If the void angle is between 90 and 180
113
Chapter 24
degrees then the column is an edge type. If the void angle is
180 degrees or more then the column is a corner type.
See Column connection type on page 626 of Chapter 65,
Punching Shear Design Notes for more information.
114
RAM Concept
Chapter 24
).
RAM Concept
115
Chapter 24
116
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
117
Chapter 25
Span Set Determines the set the reinforcement belongs to:
latitude or longitude.
180 Hook:
Anchored:
Top
Bottom
Both
Auto
118
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
The parallelogram is initially a rectangle with a default
width, but you can use the stretch tool to edit the width and
the skew tool to change the shape.
).
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
).
).
).
bars over part of the floor on page 121 for more information.
).
reinforcement.
bars over the entire floor on page 121 for more information.
).
reinforcement.
RAM Concept
119
Chapter 25
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the
file is run you can view the individual bars.
120
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
Example 25-4 Drawing distributed bottom bars over part
of the floor
Figure 25-6 Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by clicking at 5 vertices with the Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is
turned ON.
Figure 25-8 Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at
points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool.
Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 25-7 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept
Figure 25-9 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF.
121
Chapter 25
Example 25-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor
).
).
122
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
To apply hooks to reinforcement near the slab edge
).
Figure 25-12 Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
parallel to the desired orientation
RAM Concept
123
Chapter 25
Example 25-8 Skewing concentrated reinforcement
Figure 25-14 Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 25-15 The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line
parallel to line AB.
124
Figure 25-16 Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated
reinforcement parallelogram
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
Example 25-10 Automatically applying hooks to user reinforcement
Figure 25-18 Use the auto hook tool to apply hooks to all four concentrated bar callouts
Figure 25-19 Hooks applied and bars extended to the slab edge
$S - Bar spacing
RAM Concept
Chapter 25
$S - Stud spacing
(28)#5x15T
Example 25-12 AS 3600-2001
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
$L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view
such as:
28 N16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format
specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text:
(28)N16x4.57T
Example 25-13 BS 8110 : 1997, EC2 and IS456-2000
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
$L $U $F@$S $u would generate text on the plan view
such as:
28 T16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format
specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F would generate the text:
(28)T16x4.57T
126
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
26 Defining Tendons
Note: You could bypass this chapter if you are designing a
structure with only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning
that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is particularly
true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on
strength, deflection and crack control rather than
hypothetical service stresses.
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable
service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT
solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but
abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a design
criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in
that direction. Some computer generated tendon layouts are
not practical for real design.
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a
workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and
loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this
extremely difficult in 3D.
Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the
tendons by generating or drawing them in plan and
specifying parameters such as profile and number of
strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following
for your first estimate:
your experience
a preliminary run with Strip Wizard
a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A)
considerations
a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag
incorrect guesses, and you can use The Auditor for help
in iterating)
RAM Concept
127
Chapter 26
128
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Number of Strands Only enabled when strands is
selected for Tendon Specification Type. For banded
tendon polylines, this value represents the total number of
strands to be generated in the banded group. For distributed
tendon quadrilaterals, this represents the number of strands
per unit width of slab to generate in the distributed tendon
array.
Max Strands/Tendon For banded tendon polylines, this
value defines the maximum number of strands to put into a
single generated tendon.
Layout Type For banded tendon polylines, this value
defines the layout type of the generated tendons. The
choices are:
Spacing
Width
Tendon Spacing Defines the lateral spacing between
generated tendons.
Primary
Added
Added Tendon Generation For banded tendon
polylines, controls the behavior of the automatic generation
of added tendons to balance forces at connected banded
tendon polyline ends. The choices are:
None
Fixed Length
Span Fraction
Added Tendon Length For banded tendon polylines
when Fixed Length is selected for Added Tendon
Generation, controls the length of the automatically
generated banded tendon polyline.
Added Tendon Span Fraction For banded tendon
polylines when Span Fraction is selected for Added
Tendon Generation, controls the length of the
automatically generated banded tendon polyline as a
function of the span containing the joint that the added
tendon is attached.
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for
the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the size
and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the
PT system properties. It is possible to mix systems in a
single tendon parameters layer.
RAM Concept
129
Chapter 26
The support profile polylines are displayed graphically as
solid lines on plan, while the span polylines are displayed
as dashed lines.
),
), or
130
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end
2 is at midspan. This is a commonly used value.
).
RAM Concept
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
131
Chapter 26
).
).
defined.
5 Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
3 To generate support polylines from the span segments,
4 Set the span ratio for the generated span polylines. This
).
generated between (
).
).
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
).
RAM Concept
133
Chapter 26
).
134
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Description - a user formatted string used to describe the
distributed tendon quadrilateral properties.
The formatted description strings for the banded tendon
polyline use the following key values:
Arrow
$F - force/width
$f - force/width units
$N - number of strands
$n - number of strands/width units
$P - PT system name
$I - inflection point ratio
$S - spacing
$s - spacing units
$A - angle and units
\n - new line
Profile Points - displays the profile control point information for the banded tendon polyline. The profile values
are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of
the strands. In addition to the profile points where the
main tendon intersects profile polylines, the following
additional points are provided to describe the distributed
tendon profiles:
Edges - profiles at the edge of the distributed
tendon quadrilaterals or slab edges.
Span Changes - profiles at drastic changes in span
profiles.
Concrete Elevation Changes - profile changes
where the concrete reference plane changes such as
beams or drop caps.
Profile Polyline Ends - profiles at the ends of
profile polylines
The intent is that with all these points displayed the
profiling of all tendons within the distributed tendon
quadrilateral are defined by connecting support and span
profile points. Profile points are not displayed at slab edges
where no profile polylines are used.
Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of
the distributed tendon quadrilateral main tendon. Choices
are:
None
Stressing End
Dead End
).
Break
Symbol @ Extent Ends - displays the symbol at the end
of the distributed tendon quadrilateral extent line. Choices
are:
None
RAM Concept
135
Chapter 26
To draw a full-span tendon:
).
2 Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End
Note: The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool
(
) or the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance
loads option in the Tendon Properties dialog box.
26.12.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the
tendon polyline
The Tendon Polyline tool (
) allows you to draw a series
of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
To draw a tendon polyline:
).
Figure 26-1 Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
Figure 26-2 Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Fixed draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing
distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons.
Equal (not to exceed maximum) draws tendons an equal
distance apart that is at most the spacing value.
Auto connect (based on last edge) draws tendons
connected to the profile points on the last edge of the
tendon panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge
tendons.
).
2 Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon
).
RAM Concept
137
Chapter 26
Tendon layer.
2 Choose > Tools > Change Profiles.
138
RAM Concept
Chapter 26
Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to
friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You
would enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers
recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You
might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded
tendons.
Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use
this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental
curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the
product of the angle friction coefficient and the accidental
angular change per unit length.
RAM Concept
).
139
Chapter 26
140
RAM Concept
Chapter 27
27-1.
Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Structural System, but not in RAM Concept.
Chapter 27
Loading type - Only certain loading types may be
reduced (as is discussed above)
Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules
for certain member types (such as columns)
Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a
maximum reduction value for each member.
Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the
number of levels supported when calculating the allowed
reductions. If RAM Concept's automatic calculation of
areas is used, then the number of levels supported is
assumed to be one.
142
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
28 Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the
modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as
elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection)
or wait until modeling is close to finished.
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until
all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It makes
sense, however, to run the file during modeling to check
for errors. That way you could avoid repeating the same
modeling error.
The slider on the left side of the Calc dialog box determines
the level to which Concept performs the calculations. The
options are:
Through analysis Calculations are performed up to and
including the global slab analysis (slab moments
deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces.
Through design Concept performs the design of strips,
sections and punching shear checks, in addition to all the
Through analysis calculations.
Through layout Concept performs the layout of program
reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in addition to all
the Through design calculations.
All Concept performs the detailing of program
reinforcement into individual bars (viewable in
perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout
calculations.
The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog
window provide options on how Concept performs the
calculations. The options are:
Skip warnings Optional warnings do not stop the
calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc Log. This
setting is off by default.
Calculate only out-of-date items Existing calculation
results are not replaced by new calculations unless Concept
detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This
setting is on by default.
Warnings invalidate calculations Previous
calculation warnings are considered to invalidate their
associated results, causing the re-calculation of the item
that caused the warning. This setting is on by default.
RAM Concept
143
Chapter 28
tensioning and report any failed locations. Since RAM
Concept does not currently have user defined transverse
(shear) reinforcement, Concept always performs a
transverse shear (and SSR design for punching shear)
design for the given longitudinal reinforcement. When a
calc all is run using this option, any program
reinforcement will be deleted before the start of the
analysis and no additional program reinforcement will be
designed.
144
RAM Concept
Chapter 28
RAM Concept
145
Chapter 28
parameters if you want Concept to arrive at different
layouts.
To calculate results:
), or choose
28.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information
becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All
(
option is grayed-out (
146
Chapter 28
alternate envelope factors to the same as load factors in the
Load Combinations window (Choose Criteria > Load
Combo to open the Load Combinations window).
SSR Design
RAM Concept
147
Chapter 28
148
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
Loading
To view reinforcement
Load Combination
Design Status
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which
layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans,
perspectives and text tables that show those results. For
example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on the
Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the
Service LC layer.
Reinforcement Plan.
To view a reinforcement plot
).
status
deflections
support reactions
precompression
load balance
bending moment contours
section stresses (for some codes)
punching shear
bearing pressures
This section explains how to find such results.
RAM Concept
149
Chapter 29
To view the status
Reactions Plan.
To view live load reactions:
Reactions Plan.
To view dead load reactions:
Note: Intensity and contour plots are accessed via the plot
Slab tab.
Deflection results that do consider cracking are available
via plots that use the Section Analysis tab and L.T.
Deflection plot.
Note: You could change these plans with the plot setting
such that the plot is no longer consistent with the plan name.
As such, changing the plot is discouraged.
See Chapter 64, Load History Deflections for more
information.
Precompression Plan.
Plan
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
).
OK.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for AS3600
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
) increases the
150
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
To view the factored moments about the x-axis
Mx Plan.
).
Plan.
).
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Max Soil
Note: You can add soil bearing pressure plans to files. See
Creating new result plans on page 152.
Plan.
).
RAM Concept
151
Chapter 29
2 Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and
click OK
mation.
).
).
Note: You can selectively turn off left, middle and right
strips. Left and right are the half middle strips. Center is
the column strip.
Example 29-3 Creating a new reactions plan
The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC
reactions plan:
Choose Layers > New Plan.
Enter a name such as Reactions.
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Reinforcement Plan.
).
Select Bending
Click OK.
Click OK.
).
Check Active.
You can create new plans for results that are not available
in the plans in the default new file setup. See Creating new
plans on page 11 and Creating new perspectives on
page 11 for more information on how to create new plans
and perspectives.
Select Standard.
152
Chapter 29
understanding the behavior of the structure (especially for
moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be
used for quantitative design purposes.
) and Selected
RAM Concept
) instead of the
153
Chapter 29
controlled by the Plot (
) dialog box have no effect on
the axial force distribution plot. The integrated axial force
value shown below the axial force distribution plot is the
sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design
sections provide a more accurate calculation of this
integrated value.
29.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of
analysis values across any line draw on the structure. These
distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the
behavior of the structure, but you should not use them for
quantitative design purposes. You should always use design
strips and design sections to determine design quantities
Figure 29-2 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
) dialog box.
154
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
Figure 29-4 and Figure 29-5 show bottom reinforcement.
The reinforcement is thirteen #4 bars, each 9.5 ft. long
[fifteen 12 mm bars, each 2.9 m long].
RAM Concept
155
Chapter 29
If a punching section can be classified by any of the
standard rules, it is considered to be a standard section.
The rules for standard sections are:
1 Interior Rectangular:
segments):
must be uniform thickness
section centroid must coincide with column centroid
all segment ends must be on same radius from the center
of the column
must be continuous (no gaps)
5 Corner or Edge Round (circular shape idealized into
156
RAM Concept
Chapter 29
RAM Concept
157
Chapter 29
158
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30 Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a
perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings
for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize
these settings or create new plans and perspectives that
show your desired plots.
).
Figure 30-1 The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
).
30.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to
display and control various slab analysis plot quantities
such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area
spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-plane
shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value.
Other plot values are not dependent upon depth.
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without
curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element by
element, which can make it difficult to observe the results
of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities, nothing
will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM
Concept allows you to define a resolution for the selected
plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen
regeneration times.
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the
contour lines by unchecking Use default magnitudes and
entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots,
you can set the upper and lower limits of the contour values
by entering the minimum and maximum values.
RAM Concept
159
Chapter 30
The following slab maximum and minimum context plot
values should always be considered approximate:
Values for any axis that is not the x- or y- axis.
Stress values for any depth that is not mid-depth.
Lateral deflection values for any depth that is not middepth.
Lateral deflection values where the center of the slab is
not at elevation zero.
Layer Type
Standard
Loading
Values with full applied Maximum values that occur considloads (no pattern loading) ering each pattern loading (complete
with pattern factors) and the full
loading.
Linear combination of
Loading Standard values
Load Combination using the Standard load
factors
Single
Lateral Group
(not available)
Load Combination
Max
(not available)
Rule Set
Min
160
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
30.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to
display and control analysis reaction quantities. Selecting
the Standard context button displays reactions
corresponding to the standard results (more information
about standard and enveloping results is available in
Chapter 50, Analysis Notes). For the standard results,
you can display any number of reactions for column
above/below, wall above/below, point spring/support, line
spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the
punching checks. If a column above and below occur at the
same location in plan, and both Column Above and
Column Below boxes are checked, the sum of the reactions
is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls
above and below.
The other buttons in the Context group are for the
enveloped results. Concept displays reactions for columns
(above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result
of the selected context. Wall reactions will be enveloped
and available for plotting in future versions.
30.4 Strip
RAM Concept
161
Chapter 30
nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use
in torsion design.
Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design
layers.
RAM Concept
Chapter 30
With Span Detailing
Without Span Detailing, and
User Provided Reinf.
Span detailing is explained in Section 53.1 on page 407 of
Chapter 53, Reinforcement Notes.
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Top Dev
(none)
Bottom Dev
Shear
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
Table 30-2 Effects of span detailing context on rule set plots
RAM Concept
163
Chapter 30
Value
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom
Top Dev
Bottom Dev
As calculated per section Plotted values are the maximum of Vector component of developed area
the reinforcement calculated per sec- of user individual bars intersected by
the cross sections
tion and the amount of developed
reinforcement calculated from the
span-detailed amounts of non-developed reinforcement (see Section 53.1
Span detailing of Chapter 53,
Reinforcement Notes).
These values are used in the final
capacity check calculations.
Shear
(none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
Table 30-3 Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
164
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
Pass 1
Pass 2
Final check
number
2 Concrete components for a cross section
density
stress limits.
elevation
yield stress
Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
bar area
bar diameter
4 Tendon properties for each tendon type
Chapter 31
S-component [the component of the tendon perpendicular to the design strip cross-section (parallel to the
design strip spine)]
Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon
across the cross-section (only used for hyperstatic calculations)]
force
force elevation
Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
elevation
strain
length
stress
bar area
duct width
force
elevation
number of ducts
cross-section strain
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design >
Selected Plan
As Top
As Bot.
As Shear Density
As Shear Spacing
As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule
governed.
7 Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
166
).
Chapter 31
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
axis angle
radius
4 Cover to CGS
7 Resultant envelopes
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
Status Plan
2 Select the Auditor tool (
).
5 Concrete Strength
6 Precompression
design).
11 Summary
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Figure 31-1 Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to comply with code.
Selected Plan
2 Select the Punching Check Auditor tool (
).
to audit.
Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been
performed.
RAM Concept
Chapter 31
To use the Auditor for the design summary:
168
RAM Concept
Chapter 32
).
individal tab. Select the tab for the desired punch check.
Note: The Report will not be displayed if a Calc All has not
been performed.
the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayedout (
), the analysis results are current).
RAM Concept
169
Chapter 32
170
RAM Concept
Chapter 33
You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit
costs into materials and installation (labor).
To edit the unit costs:
RAM Concept
171
Chapter 33
172
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization
options to help you create professional printouts and
reports. You control the information included on a page and
in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be printed
individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes
the printing features you can use to achieve the result you
want and offers techniques for printing efficiently.
3 Click Print.
In the Select and Configure Printer dialog box, you can set
the printer, page size and source, default orientation, and
margin size for your printed pages. These per-printer
settings are stored on your system and are used as the
default settings every time you print.
173
Chapter 34
RAM Concept can print on any printer with the appropriate
printer drivers installed.
Area tool (
).
area and enter the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates in
the Printing Area Setup dialog. Check Set for all plans if
you want this printing area to be used by all plans.
3 Click OK.
).
).
2 Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK.
).
).
).
) or Wire Modeling (
).
).
).
boundary.
174
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
34.6.1 Zooming
) to page back.
In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line
type of plan and perspective windows on the screen, you
can customize their appearance in print.
Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to
set the appearance settings for a plan or perspective you
wish to print. See Changing colors, font, and line type on
page 13 for more information about appearance schemes
and changing appearance settings.
If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same
appearance settings as what you see in the respective
window, click Set Same As Screen on the Print tab. In most
cases, you want:
background color in printing to be white (no printed
background)
print font size to be smaller then the screen font
print line scale to be larger then on screen
RAM Concept
175
Chapter 34
176
RAM Concept
Chapter 34
Load History Deflection Plans
RAM Concept
new location inside the Criteria folder but you cannot move
it into the Layers folder.
To change the location of a report item:
177
Chapter 34
178
RAM Concept
Chapter 35
3 In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and
click OK.
4 Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
) or Shrink Fonts
) to change the text size before exporting.
Save.
The File Units dialog box appears.
3 Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
RAM Concept
179
Chapter 35
180
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
RAM Concept
181
Chapter 36
same floor type, and labels them Identical Story or
Compatible Story. A story is compatible with, but not
identical to, the source story if it has a different story
height, member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any
columns above it have different orientations.
Select any combination of stories, and click OK. RAM
Concept displays a log detailing the results of the export
operation when the export is completed.
182
RAM Concept
Chapter 36
System.
The dialog lists the floor types present in the RSS file.
3 Enter the new floor type name in the New Floor Type
183
Chapter 36
4 Click Create New Floor Type to export the selected
184
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
RAM Concept
Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for
the supports.
185
Chapter 37
Length
The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the
span. For asymmetric strips, L Start Width is the left start
width, and R Start Width is the right start width.
Length
End Width
F Depth
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the
span to the pan (or void former).
Pan End Offset
The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the
end of the span.
Additional Web Properties
F Depth
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span.
For asymmetric strips, L Trib End Width is the left
tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary
end width.
Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the
supports. They can vary span by span.
186
Chapter 37
Depth
The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the zdirection for two standard loadings.
Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings
on each span.
Bottom Fixity
Top Fixity
The line load from the first support center to the second
support center for each span.
Live Area Load
The live load from the first support center to the second
support center for each span.
Loadings to use
The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the
loads as belonging to any of the Standard loadings in the
RAM Concept file.
Dead
Thickness
Width
RAM Concept
187
Chapter 37
PT System
Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as
defined in the Materials Specification of the RAM Concept
file).
Stressing
Top
Min P/A
Bottom
Top
37.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile Distance at Supports
188
Bottom
The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the
top reinforcement. Usually this is the distance from the top
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the d
distance.
RAM Concept
Chapter 37
click Save.
RAM Concept
189
Chapter 37
190
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
38 General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept
and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
38.2 Walls
38.2.1 Drawing connecting walls
It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such
that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other, as
shown in 38-2.
38.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use
standard finite elements then the beams torsional stiffness
could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce
the deflection in the adjacent slabs.
In Concept, there is no difference between standard slab
and beam elements, and standard elements have a torsional
stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed.
The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to
the cube of the lesser value of depth and width. Standard
elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams
that are deeper than they are wide.
For this reason, you should consider using the No-torsion
behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See
Beam properties on page 66 for more information.
Figure 38-3 Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that
one has a wall above (Two images with slab shown, two with no slab
shown).
RAM Concept
191
Chapter 38
38.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (posttensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model
columns with rollers and walls as slip walls (shear wall
property unchecked).
It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a
roller above will generally be appropriate
Figure 38-4 Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above
(right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
38.4 Miscellaneous
38.4.1 Templates
workspace.
4 Type the letter r followed by the x- and y-coordinates
RAM Concept
Chapter 38
This moves a copy of the selection x units to the right and y
units upward.
Note: Many users complain that there is too much information revealed by the auditor. You can reduce the information by auditing a rule set rather than the design
summary.
RAM Concept
193
Chapter 38
194
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
techniques are suitable for such structures. See the FAQ for
Mats (rafts) on page 198.
Is Concept capable of running a single design strip for quick
preliminary runs without modeling the whole building?
Yes. See Chapter 37, Using Strip Wizard and Chapter 49,
Strip Wizard Tutorial.
Can I model a pour strip?
1 Use the orthotropic properties for the pour strip area such
that the axial stiffness perpendicular to the strip is significantly reduced. See the discussion below Figure 17-6 on
page 65
2 Terminate tendons either side of the pour strip.
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.2 Files
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?
Double click at the location and you should select just one
object. Hold down shift and double click again and you
select the other object.
Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
196
) or Show Print
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Why can I not see the area springs in a perspective?
This means that more than one object has been selected and
they have different values for that property. For example, if
you select two slab objects that have different thicknesses
then the thickness field displays conflicting.
Yes.
1 Select all of the columns or walls you wish to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
39.4 Units
39.7 Structure
39.7.1 Mesh Input layer
Why is it necessary to have priorities?
RAM Concept
What value should I use for the area springs Z force constant?
197
Chapter 39
What is the difference between beam and slab elements?
39.7.3 Columns
Do columns restrain the slab?
39.7.4 Walls
Do walls restrain the slab laterally?
No.
Can the soil stiffness vary?
Yes. You can vary the stiffness in two directions. See Area
spring properties on page 63.
No, they act like beams. See Walls above on page 191.
198
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
39.8 Tendons
Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the
tendon perspective?
Note: You should only use this method for tendons with no
jacks attached. This is because a jack attached to tendons of
different lengths has inaccurate seating (wedge draw-in)
loss calculations.
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Along each tendon the following formula used is:
P2 = P1 * exp-(mu * theta + k * L)
where
where
200
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
Where:
39.9 Loadings
Is pattern loading possible?
Fx0 = 100kN
Fx1 = -50kN
Fx2 = -50kN
Fz1 = -15kN
Fz2 = 15kN
My1 = 75kN-m
My2 = 75kN-m
RAM Concept
201
Chapter 39
For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider
(all of these are from the frame analysis). The forces that
the columns apply to the slab are:
Fx3 = 50kN
Fx4 = -50kN
Fx5 = 50kN
Fx6 = -50kN
Fz3 = 15kN
Fz4 = -45kN
Fz5 = -15kN
Fz6 = 45kN
My3 = 75kN-m
My4 = 75kN-m
My5 = 75kN-m
My6 = 75kN-m
Chapter 39
Analyze the slab (and see that the reactions keep the slab
attached to the supports).
39.12 Results
Apply the support reactions as loads (they will be a selfequilibrium set). Ensure that the load elevations are set
correctly.
39.12.1 Reactions
Analyze the slab (and see that the reaction loads keep
that slab attached to the supports).
39.10 Analysis
Should I use Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions in
the Calc Options?
The wall reactions are shown per straight section of wall. Can I
see the reaction per wall element?
The only reason not to check the box is that cracked section
analyses can be slow. See Detailed Section Analysis on
page 147 of Chapter 28, Calculating Results.
RAM Concept
203
Chapter 39
39.12.2 Plots
Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis
parallel to the edge?
39.12.3 Torsion
I have set the Behavior of a beam to No-torsion. Why is there
still torsion in the beam?
39.12.4 Envelopes
What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots?
204
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
The result is a list of envelopes (possibly just one, but also
possibly up to 12).
39.12.5 Reinforcement
Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
Yes.
1 Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Designs columns.
RAM Concept
205
Chapter 39
Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a
bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
Figure 39-9 Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small number of strands (ii) near neutral axis
No.
What is the stress ratio?
reinforcement, or
2 insufficient (reinforcement cannot solve the problem and
the concrete form needs revision).
Why is there a punching failure at a beam? I thought that
punching shear failures occur only in flat slabs.
Figure 39-7 Assumed stress distribution
206
RAM Concept
Chapter 39
It would be possible, but very rare, for a punching failure at
column B since it is satisfactory for one-way shear in the
beam (with reinforcement).
Figure 39-10 Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams
RAM Concept
207
Chapter 39
What does this audit text mean: Depth d is zero - replacing
with column effective depth. Depth is still zero - giving up.?
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design >
Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
39.12.10 Deflection
Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
208
39.13 Performance
What are the graphics cards requirements?
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
) dialog box.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
3 Check the Numbers box under the appropriate objects
40.1 Meshing
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
RAM Concept
209
Chapter 40
).
and delete.
40.3 Tendons
40.1.6 An error has been found. A column
element below the slab is not attached to the
slab. Revise column element #a (below the
slab)
40.2 Loads
40.2.1 An error has occurred while
assembling the load vector. A point load is not
on the slab. Revise point load #a.
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an
error. Apart from generating the error, Concept essentially
ignores the load.
210
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
The Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option
is intended to move the plan position of Profile Point 2 so
that the uplift is equal for both tendon segments. This is not
possible when one tendon segment is flat (zero drape) as
there is no uplift in that tendon segment.
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
sure a large portion of the slab is covered by cross section
tributaries in two pependicular directions. This warning can
be safely ignored in one-way slab regions where the
spanning direction is appropriately covered by cross
sections.
40.5 Miscellaneous
40.5.1 An Error occurred while trying to
calculate everything. An error has occurred
while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The
structure is unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis
Translation. Revise the structure.
This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You
need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear
walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral
springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure.
To auto-stabilize the structure:
box.
212
RAM Concept
Chapter 40
).
RAM Concept
213
Chapter 40
214
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
).
).
(the cursor will snap to the grid and the coordinates appear
in the command line):
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
).
).
4 Click OK.
after each:
0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
).
).
properties.
4 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
RAM Concept
215
Chapter 41
Hatch the slab area:
).
OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does
not yet exist.
Figure 41-1 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab area (hatched), and the columns.
Generate the mesh:
).
216
Figure 41-3 Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456 and
CSA A23.3 example).
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
).
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m2].
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate
the floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
).
Figure 41-6 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on): ACI318 example.
RAM Concept
217
Chapter 41
Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip
Properties box.
Click OK.
4 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Figure 41-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456, & CSA A23.3 example.
Generate Strips.
The latitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 41-10.
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
Generation properties.
Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is
the default for the AS3600 and IS 456 templates).
Click the General tab.
Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
Click the Column Strip tab.
Change CS Top Bar to #6 [N20 for AS3600; T20
for BS8110; H20 for EC2; T20 for IS 456; 20M for
CSA A23.3].
Change CS Bottom Bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600;
T16 for BS8110; H16 for EC2; T16 for IS 456].
218
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Click the up-down orientation button, and click
OK.
Figure 41-10 Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Figure 41-11 Generate spans dialog box
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
Generate Strips.
dialog box.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
RAM Concept
219
Chapter 41
Figure 41-13 Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much
more regular mesh.
).
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the
).
).
220
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
View Reinforcement:
Figure 41-15 Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456
Figure 41-16 Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)
RAM Concept
221
Chapter 41
design strip cross section. The following uses latitude
bottom reinforcement as an example.
View Reinforcement Controlling Criteria:
Reinforcement Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Figure 41-19 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 &
#2)
Reinforcement Plan.
See Figures 41-21 through 41-24.
222
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
RAM Concept
223
Chapter 41
6 Check the Active box.
7 Select the Bottom radio button.
8 Change Max Frame Number to 2, and click OK.
).
224
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
You can see that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the
unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0 and hence
punching shear capacity is satisfactory. These results are
shown in Figure 41-33, Figure 41-34 and 41-37.
The USR for BS8110 is 1.17, as shown in Figure 41-35.
Since the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, shear reinforcement is
required. Concept designs stud shear reinforcement (SSR)
for such situations.
View SSR:
Figure 41-33 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Plan.
Figure 41-34 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600
RAM Concept
225
Chapter 41
Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours.
You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
cracking with Load History Deflections. See Chapter 64,
Load History Deflections for more information.
Deflection Plan.
The service deflection contours should be visible, as shown
in Figures 41-38 through 41-41.
Figure 41-35 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd
#1 & #2).
Figure 41-36 Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 41-37 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
41.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead
and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term.
226
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
View Moments:
).
bottom side.
Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot (
) to change
RAM Concept
227
Chapter 41
Figure 41-42 Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for ACI318.
Figure 41-44 Ultimate LC: 1.4D+1.6L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for BS8110.
Figure 41-45 Ultimate LC: 1.5D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for IS 456.
Figure 41-43 Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for AS3600.
tool (
).
228
RAM Concept
Chapter 41
Note that Elevation Reference is set to Bottom
Cover.
Change Elevation to 0.75 inches [25 mm for
AS3600, BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
Change Bar Type to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for
BS8110; T16 for IS 456; H16 for EC2; 15M for
CSA A23.3].
Change Spacing to 12 inches [225 mm for
AS3600; BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
4 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
).
7 Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar grip
RAM Concept
229
Chapter 41
Figure 41-49 AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
230
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
86, 27 ft and 86, 29 ft. Cursor plan coordinates display next
to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
Figure 42-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the balcony slab area:
properties.
RAM Concept
231
Chapter 42
3 With the Slab Area tool (
).
Figure 42-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
).
Click OK.
) selected, define the four
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
).
3 Click OK.
).
).
232
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
3 Click Generate.
the centerline.
Place the cursor near 29.5, 87 ft and it will snap to
where the center of the wall intersects the edge of
the slab, and click.
Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2
(it will snap orthogonally) and click.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh
does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method.
7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
).
Figure 42-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:
).
3 feet.
RAM Concept
233
Chapter 42
Figure 42-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
).
Figure 42-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
Define the other dead loading:
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
234
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 42-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
235
Chapter 42
).
) to edit its
default properties.
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
).
) selected, draw a
) to edit its
default properties.
10 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
236
) selected, draw a
) selected, draw a
segment at B-2.
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
23 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -2.58 kips/ft. If this is not the
number then you probably selected only one tendon
segment.
27 Click Cancel.
28 With the Selection tool (
).
Tendon Parameters.
2 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
3 Turn on Snap to Intersection (
).
).
) to
box:
Set Number of Strands to 9, and click OK.
6 With the Banded Tendon Polyline tool (
) selected,
) to edit its
default properties.
2 In the Default Profile Polyline Properties dialog box:
RAM Concept
237
Chapter 42
Click at the bottom of the column intersection with line
4 at D-4.
Right click and select Enter.
) selected,
Type r0,-2.
) selected,
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
).
) selected,
238
).
) to
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6
inches and Profile at end 2 to 4 inches, and click OK.
) selected,
) selected,
) selected,
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some
should be deleted.
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon in this panel,
) selected,
).
Type r0,7.
Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
).
) selected,
) selected,
RAM Concept
239
Chapter 42
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
33 With the Selection tool (
segment at B-2.
40 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).
).
Tendon Parameters.
3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal (
4 Turn on Snap to Intersection (
).
).
).
Change the Tendon Orientation Angle to 90 degrees.
Change the Number of Strands to 0.6667 /feet, and click
OK.
selected:
Click the corner of the slab at A-1.
Click the corner of the slab at C-1.
Click the center of the column at C-2.
Click the edge of the slab at A-2.
240
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
22 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
) to edit its
default properties.
).
).
).
8 Hold down the shift key, click anywhere on the plan, and
type r0,-0.75.
9 Select the profile polyline between B-1 and B-2.
10 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
).
).
).
).
).
RAM Concept
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
241
Chapter 42
4 Change Environment to Class U (corrosive).
Elevated Slab.
9 Click OK.
10 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude.
11 Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet and click OK.
Figure 42-15 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
Generate Strips.
1 Select span segment 4-2 (between the wall and grid D3),
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
2 Turn on Snap to Intersection (
3 Select the Rotate tool (
).
).
).
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
Figure 42-19 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
Generate Spans.
RAM Concept
243
Chapter 42
Click OK.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
Figure 42-21 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
).
box:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Click OK.
Delete.
244
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
Regenerate the mesh:
).
RAM Concept
245
Chapter 42
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
Calculate:
).
Recalculate:
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 42-24 and Figure 42-25.
Figure 42-24 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 42-25 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4224.
246
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there
are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress
and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive
deflections.
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
There are punching shear status results at each column.
You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching
plan.
2 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations and OK with SSR at one column.
Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it
means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three ACI 318-05 cases: interior, edge and
corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections: ACI
318 and CSA A23.3 on page 156 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
If Concept reports Failed then SSR does not solve the
problem and a thickening is required.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
much clutter.
RAM Concept
247
Chapter 42
Click OK
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
42.7.4 Deflection
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the
concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are
the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
), or choose
).
248
RAM Concept
Chapter 42
).
) to change
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
Figure 42-34 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of
Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept
249
Chapter 42
View the balanced load percentages:
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
250
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
click OK.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
Figure 43-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the balcony slab area:
properties.
RAM Concept
251
Chapter 43
3 With the Slab Area tool (
).
Figure 43-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
).
Click OK.
) selected, define the four
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
).
).
).
252
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
4 Click OK.
1 m.
the centerline:
3 Click Generate.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
).
Figure 43-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:
).
Figure 43-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
RAM Concept
253
Chapter 43
Figure 43-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
).
Figure 43-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
Define the other dead loading:
Loads Plan.
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
254
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 43-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
255
Chapter 43
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 231.
Define the manual latitude tendons:
) selected,
) selected,
).
) to
) selected,
).
) selected,
256
) selected,
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
19 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
) selected,
segment at B-2.
38 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
) selected,
below grid B.
26 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
41 Hold down the Shift key, and double click the tendon
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -5.67 kN/m. If this is not the number
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
46 Click Cancel.
47 With the Selection tool (
).
257
Chapter 43
52 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
mm and click OK.
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
) selected,
).
) selected,
).
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
).
) selected,
258
) selected,
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-2.
Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Click at the center of the column at B-3.
Click at the center of the column at A-3.
16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
) selected,
Set Spacing to 2 m.
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some
should be deleted.
this panel.
26 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
) selected,
Delete.
) selected,
).
Type r0,2.1.
) selected,
) selected,
) selected,
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
35 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
RAM Concept
259
Chapter 43
37 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
to 5, and click OK.
segment at B-2.
45 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
Plan.
).
260
).
).
Chapter 43
5 Click the Column Strip tab.
6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle.
7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
8 Click the Middle Strip tab.
9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
10 Click OK.
11 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12 Click OK.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 43-14 Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall
Straighten a span segment:
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
RAM Concept
).
261
Chapter 43
3 Select the Rotate tool (
).
).
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
vertical.
3 Click at point B.
4 Right-click, and click enter.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
7 Right-click, and click enter.
8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool(
).
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
Figure 43-16 Design strip with excessive width.
click OK.
This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
).
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown
in Figure 43-18.
Figure 43-18 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
).
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
).
Click OK.
).
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
RAM Concept
263
Chapter 43
8 Click at point C and D.
9 Right-click, and click enter.
10 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool(
).
(another corner).
13 Right-click, and click enter.
14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.
15 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
Figure 43-20 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
).
264
).
Figure 43-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
).
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to
centroid of top reinforcement).
Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
).
RAM Concept
265
Chapter 43
Figure 43-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4325.
Calculate:
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 43-25 and Figure 43-26.
Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
266
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
The above changes are made to eliminate the reinforcement
warnings. In a proper design you should investigate this
further.
Recalculate:
Plan.
You can see that ten columns have an unreinforced stress
ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Two columns report OK with
SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
One column fails in punching. SSR does not solve the
problem. A thickening is required.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at five column
locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections:
AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 156 of Chapter
29 for more information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there
are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
There are punching shear status results at each column.
You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching
plan.
Figure 43-28 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan.
RAM Concept
267
Chapter 43
43.7.3 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
), or choose
much clutter.
) to change
268
RAM Concept
Chapter 43
4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid
intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
Figure 43-33 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Plan
).
RAM Concept
).
269
Chapter 43
270
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
click OK.
Figure 44-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
271
Chapter 44
Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
).
Figure 44-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
272
).
).
).
Chapter 44
4 Click OK.
the centerline.
Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the
edge of the slab, and click.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
Figure 44-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
).
).
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
RAM Concept
273
Chapter 44
Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to
define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the
additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be
specified.
Define the typical live load:
).
Figure 44-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
Figure 44-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
274
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 44-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
275
Chapter 44
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 231.
).
) selected, draw a
).
) to edit its
default properties.
13 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
) selected, draw a
).
) selected, draw a
) to edit its
default properties.
).
276
) selected, draw a
) selected,
Chapter 44
Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
segment at B-2.
26 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -32.4 kN/m. If this is not the number
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
), select the tendon between
RAM Concept
).
) to
33 Click Cancel.
34 With the Selection tool (
).
) selected,
277
Chapter 44
Click at the center of the column at B-1.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
) selected,
) selected,
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
) selected,
).
) selected,
).
) selected,
) selected,
) selected,
278
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
this panel.
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
Delete.
29 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
).
Type r0,2.1.
segment at B-2.
) selected,
) selected,
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
37 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
RAM Concept
).
).
279
Chapter 44
55 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
280
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
).
Elevated Slab.
7 Click OK.
Generate Strips.
Generate Spans.
Figure 44-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept
281
Chapter 44
as shown in Figures 44-14 through 44-16. You can make
corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
on.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
).
).
).
).
282
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
Figure 44-17 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
).
).
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Delete.
Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
horizontal.
RAM Concept
283
Chapter 44
Generate the longitude strips:
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
284
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
Calculate:
).
Recalculate:
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 44-22 and Figure 44-23.
Figure 44-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 44-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4422.
RAM Concept
285
Chapter 44
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is TR43
6.10.2. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is
the transfer condition. It is known as the Initial Service
Rule Set in Concept.
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations and OK with SSR at eight columns.
Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it
means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept
still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2
and IS 456 on page 156 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
much clutter.
286
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed
reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
RAM Concept
).
44.7.4 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
), or choose
287
Chapter 44
).
) to change
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
Figure 44-32 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
288
RAM Concept
Chapter 44
View the balanced load percentages:
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
RAM Concept
).
289
Chapter 44
290
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
click OK.
Figure 45-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
291
Chapter 45
Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
).
Figure 45-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
292
).
).
).
Chapter 45
4 Click OK.
the centerline.
Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the
edge of the slab, and click.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
Figure 45-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
).
).
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
RAM Concept
293
Chapter 45
Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to
define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the
additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be
specified.
Define the typical live load:
).
Figure 45-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
Figure 45-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
294
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 45-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
295
Chapter 45
).
) selected, draw a
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 231.
).
) to edit its
default properties.
Set Strands per Tendon to 20, and click OK.
14 With the Tendon Polyline tool (
) selected, draw a
).
) selected, draw a
) to edit its
default properties.
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
) selected,
) selected, draw a
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.81.
segment at B-2.
26 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -32.4 kN/m. If this is not the number
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
), select the tendon between
).
RAM Concept
).
) to
33 Click Cancel.
34 With the Selection tool (
) selected,
297
Chapter 45
Click at the center of the column at A-2.
Set Spacing to 2 m.
) selected,
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
) selected,
).
) selected,
).
) selected,
) selected,
298
) selected,
) selected,
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Click at the center of the column at D-4.
Click at the center of the column at C-4.
26 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
this panel.
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
Delete.
29 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
).
Type r0,2.1.
segment at B-2.
) selected,
) selected,
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
37 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the
opening.
49 With the Selection tool (
).
).
RAM Concept
299
Chapter 45
Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility
tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information.
300
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
).
Generate Strips.
Elevated Slab.
7 Click OK.
8 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.75 meters.
9 Click OK.
Figure 45-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept
301
Chapter 45
as shown in Figures 45-14 through 45-16. You can make
corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
on.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
).
).
).
).
302
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
Figure 45-17 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
).
).
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Delete.
Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
horizontal.
RAM Concept
303
Chapter 45
Generate the longitude strips:
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
304
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is
causing a problem because of the combination of the drop
cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
Calculate:
).
Recalculate:
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 45-22 and Figure 45-23.
Figure 45-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 45-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4522.
RAM Concept
305
Chapter 45
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations and OK with SSR at eight columns.
Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it
means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept
still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Refer to Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2
and IS 456 on page 156 of Chapter 29 for more
information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
306
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
).
RAM Concept
307
Chapter 45
) to change
45.7.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
), or choose
308
RAM Concept
Chapter 45
).
Figure 45-33 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L Max Mx Plan showing
use of Plot Distribution tool.
).
intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
7 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
RAM Concept
309
Chapter 45
310
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
click OK.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
Figure 46-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the balcony slab area:
properties.
RAM Concept
311
Chapter 46
3 With the Slab Area tool (
).
Figure 46-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
).
Click OK.
) selected, define the four
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
).
).
).
312
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
3 Click Generate.
the centerline:
Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the
edge of the slab, and click.
Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2
(it will snap orthogonally) and click.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh
does not yet exist.
6 Go to Generate the mesh:, or try the next method.
7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
).
Figure 46-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:
).
1 m.
RAM Concept
313
Chapter 46
Figure 46-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
).
Figure 46-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
Define the other dead loading:
Loads Plan.
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
314
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 46-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
315
Chapter 46
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 231.
Define the latitude tendons:
) selected,
) selected,
).
) to
) selected,
).
) selected,
316
) selected,
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
19 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
) selected,
segment at B-2.
38 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
) selected,
below grid B.
26 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
41 Hold down the Shift button, and double click the tendon
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -5.27 kN/m. If this is not the number
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
46 Click Cancel.
47 With the Selection tool (
).
317
Chapter 46
52 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
mm and click OK.
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
) selected,
).
) selected,
).
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
).
) selected,
318
) selected,
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-2.
Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Click at the center of the column at B-3.
Click at the center of the column at A-3.
16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
) selected,
Set Spacing to 2 m.
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool (
) selected,
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some
should be deleted.
this panel.
26 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
) selected,
Delete.
) selected,
).
Type r0,2.1.
) selected,
) selected,
) selected,
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
35 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
RAM Concept
319
Chapter 46
37 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
to 5, and click OK.
segment at B-2.
45 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
Plan.
).
).
).
320
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
8 Click the Middle Strip tab.
9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
10 Click OK.
11 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12 Click OK.
Figure 46-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
RAM Concept
).
321
Chapter 46
3 Select the Rotate tool (
).
).
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
vertical.
3 Click at point B.
4 Right-click, and click enter.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
7 Right-click, and click enter.
8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool(
).
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
Figure 46-16 Design strip with excessive width.
click OK.
This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
).
).
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown
in Figure 46-18.
Figure 46-18 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
).
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
).
Click OK.
).
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
RAM Concept
323
Chapter 46
8 Click at point C and D.
9 Right-click, and click enter.
10 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool(
).
(another corner).
13 Right-click, and click enter.
14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.
15 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool (
).
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
Figure 46-20 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
).
324
).
Figure 46-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
).
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to
centroid of top reinforcement).
Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
).
RAM Concept
325
Chapter 46
Figure 46-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4625.
Calculate:
Spans Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
).
click OK.
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool (
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 46-25 and Figure 46-26.
Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
326
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
Recalculate:
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there
are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
Plan.
You can see that seven columns have an unreinforced stress
ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Six columns report OK with
SSR which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations. Non-standard Section is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for nonstandard sections. Refer to Non-Standard Sections:
AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456 on page 156 of Chapter
29 for more information.
RAM Concept
327
Chapter 46
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
of the design strips. You might choose to view all design
reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in
the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or
longitude).
2 Choose the plans that best convey the results without too
much clutter.
) to change
46.7.3 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
), or choose
328
RAM Concept
Chapter 46
).
intersection D-3.
Figure 46-33 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
Plan
).
RAM Concept
329
Chapter 46
330
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
).
properties.
3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
click OK.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
Figure 47-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the balcony slab area:
properties.
RAM Concept
331
Chapter 47
3 With the Slab Area tool (
).
Figure 47-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:
properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
).
Click OK.
) selected, define the four
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
).
) and press
).
3 Click OK.
).
).
332
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on
the centerline.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
).
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool (
).
).
Figure 47-4 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Figure 47-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
Generate the mesh:
).
1 m.
3 Click Generate.
RAM Concept
333
Chapter 47
Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to
define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
blanket area load over the entire floor, and then draw the
additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be
specified.
Define the typical live load:
).
Figure 47-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
).
Figure 47-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool (
click OK.
334
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
9 Double-click the balcony load.
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 47-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
RAM Concept
335
Chapter 47
).
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining prestressing,
please refer to PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 on
page 231.
) selected, draw a
).
) to edit its
default properties.
13 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
) selected, draw a
).
) to edit its
default properties.
) selected,
).
) selected, draw a
336
) selected, draw a
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4.
20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at B-2.
26 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
segment at C-2.
29 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -43.57 kN/m. If this is not the
number then you probably selected only one tendon
segment.
).
33 Click Cancel.
).
) selected,
RAM Concept
) to
337
Chapter 47
Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
) selected,
Orthogonal (
) and Snap
) selected,
).
) selected,
).
) selected,
) selected,
) selected,
338
) selected,
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Set Auto Connect.
this panel.
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
Delete.
) selected,
Type r0,2.1.
Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.
) selected,
) selected,
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
37 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
RAM Concept
).
segment at B-2.
47 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
).
).
339
Chapter 47
Expanding tool buttons on page 6 and Using the Utility
tool to move and stretch on page 17 for further information.
340
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
).
Elevated Slab.
8 Click OK.
9 Click the Generate Spans tool (
Generate Strips.
), or choose Process >
Generate Spans.
Figure 47-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept
341
Chapter 47
as shown in Figures 47-14 through 47-16. You can make
corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
on.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
).
).
).
).
342
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Figure 47-17 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
).
).
Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
Delete.
Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
horizontal.
RAM Concept
343
Chapter 47
Generate the longitude strips:
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
).
).
344
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting is
causing a problem because of the combination of the drop
cap and thinner balcony slab.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Spans Plan.
Calculate:
).
Recalculate:
Sections Perspective.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
) and the
Zoom Rectangle (
) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 47-22 and Figure 47-23.
Figure 47-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 47-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 4722.
RAM Concept
345
Chapter 47
There are punching shear status results at each column.
You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching
plan.
Plan.
Concept has noted Non-standard section at six column
locations and OK with SSR at one column.
Non-standard Section is a warning, not an error. What it
means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept
still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
the columns punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
OK with SSR.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
Figure 47-26 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan.
346
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
Look at detailed top reinforcement:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
RAM Concept
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
47.7.4 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections:
), or choose
).
View maximum short term load deflection:
347
Chapter 47
) to change
).
).
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
7 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
348
RAM Concept
Chapter 47
View the balanced load percentages:
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
Figure 47-31 Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S Max Mx Plan showing
use of Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept
349
Chapter 47
350
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
).
properties.
Choose a Concrete Strength of 4000 psi [25 MPa
for AS3600; C25/30 for BS8110 and EC2].
Set Thickness to 30 inches [750 mm].
Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
Click OK.
) selected, define the four
corners of the slab by snapping to the imported drawings
slab corners.
).
).
[mat_tutorial_metric.dwg].
).
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
RAM Concept
).
351
Chapter 48
Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
Uncheck Shear Wall.
Uncheck Fixed Near and Fixed Far.
4 Click OK.
5 Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points
of the wall centerlines shown on the CAD drawing.
Define the area spring location and properties:
).
).
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
View the structure:
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool (
) to rotate the
floor.
352
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a
number of loadings (such as live, other dead, north seismic,
east seismic, north wind and east wind). For simplicity, this
tutorial will not use area loads (except for the automatic
calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging
only to other dead, live, and ultimate seismic east loadings.
This pastes the other dead loads onto the Live (Reducible)
Loading: All Loads Plan.
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
Loads Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
).
).
A-3
D-1
D-3
9 Define the rest of the point loads as shown in Figures 48-
3 and 48-4.
10 Double click the Line Load tool (
).
Note: Draw these loads to the outside face of the intersecting walls.
Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer:
For simplicity, use the same loads for other dead and live
(reducible) loads
1 With the Selection tool (
353
Chapter 48
Define the ultimate seismic east loading:
).
Click OK.
).
Figure 48-8 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a fivestorey building. The load elevation is the average floor
height (third storey).
Figure 48-6 East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
354
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool (
).
Generation properties.
Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is
the default for the AS3600 template).
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
RAM Concept
355
Chapter 48
Generate the latitude strips:
Generate Strips.
Generate Strips.
).
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
Spans Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects (
).
).
Generate Spans.
9 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
Click OK.
).
).
Figure 48-13.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
vertical.
356
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
18 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
).
Snapable Point (
).
RAM Concept
Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
Two span segments are slightly skewed. We suggest the
span segment strips cross sections are manually
reoriented.
357
Chapter 48
Figure 48-15 Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
Figure 48-16 Longitude design strips after editing and regeneration
Edit the cross section orientation:
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
horizontal.
).
3 Click near one of the span segments, and then again to the
Generate Strips.
).
box:
Change Cover to CGS to 3 inches [60 mm] (cover
to centroid of top reinforcement).
Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
358
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
Regenerate the mesh:
).
RAM Concept
359
Chapter 48
After you run the model, you can view the results of the
analysis and design calculations.
Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
of the design strips. The results are, however, too congested
to be useful. You can access plans in the Design Status
layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or
bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural
or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the
results without too much clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:
Reinforcement Plan.
Figure 48-19 Design Status: Status Plan.
).
click OK.
Plan.
360
RAM Concept
Chapter 48
2 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design
Figure 48-23 Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
RAM Concept
361
Chapter 48
362
RAM Concept
Chapter 49
Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page.
(The type of data entered depends on which structural
system you chose on the General Parameters page.)
Set the span data as follows:
MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS
456].
6 Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [32 MPa for
RAM Concept
363
Chapter 49
Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line
Load fields blank (no need to enter zero).
mm].
2 Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
mm].
Fixed.
5 Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels
page.
values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
values:
Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm].
Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm].
364
RAM Concept
Chapter 49
Complete the strip:
1 Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard
Figure 49-2 The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
49.12 Conclusion
Figure 49-3 The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip after the mesh has been generated.
Figure 49-4 The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh regeneration.
RAM Concept
365
Chapter 49
366
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50 Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific information on
how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
RAM Concept
367
Chapter 50
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be:
Fx/x + Vxy/y = -Px
Fy/y + Vxy/x = -Py
where Px and Py are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:
368
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be:
Vxz/x + Vyz /y = -Pz
Mx/y + Txy/x = -Vyz
My/x + Txy/y = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohrs circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like relationship:
RAM Concept
369
Chapter 50
370
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Fx = Fx
Vxy = Vxy
Vxz = Vxz
My = M y - Fx d
Mxy = Mxy - Vxy d
371
Chapter 50
The elements can (optionally) have different stiffnesses in two orthogonal directions.
The elements consider transverse shear deformations.
The elements consider the relative elevations of adjacent slab elements.
If custom settings are used, and both KMrs and KMr or both KMrs and KMs are reduced, the elements may become unstable
and the analysis results may be suspect. For this reason we recommend that these parameters be kept within a limited range:
KMr / KMs > 0.5 or KMrs / KMs > 0.5
KMs / KMr > 0.5 or KMrs / KMr > 0.5
Similar instabilities can occur with KVrs and KFr/KFs.
372
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that the force and stress patterns in the
element are that of a typical slab location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and their associated
stresses.
Symbol Force
Related Stress
Fx
Fy
Vxy
Vxz
Vyz
Mx
My
Txy
Torsional moment
RAM Concept
373
Chapter 50
50.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams For bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will assume a linear distribution of bending
stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored.
In design, Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep beams and Concept
will not provide any deep beam detailing information. Concepts shallow beam calculations will generally be conservative
for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide appropriate
detailing for the deep beam.
374
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
50.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the stiffness of a deep beam
subjected to transverse bending moments. Concepts analysis will assume that the entire beam is effective in resisting the
transverse moment.
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored.
In design, it is important that Concepts design sections have the appropriate ignore depth settings, so only the portion of the
beam that is truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
RAM Concept
375
Chapter 50
The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete structural load path - for this reason it cannot be ignored. It may be
appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness of the beam (this will modify the structural load path to one that is less
376
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
dependent upon the beam torsional capacity). Concept provides four options of considering this torsion in design. See
Torsion Considerations on page 397 for more information.
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a K-factor, it is generally recommended to provide a
minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack without precipitating a failure.
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. However, it is up to the engineer to
assure that step-beam has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
RAM Concept
377
Chapter 50
Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness
Fixed Far = (ignored)
Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness
Compressible = (ignored)
Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam is accurate, the division of shear between the
wall and the slab is not well predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of the vertical shear force
carried by the slab will be between the two extremes:
As / Atotal, and
Is / Itotal
Where
As = cross-sectional area of slab in section
Atotal = cross-sectional area of slab and wall together
Is = moment of inertia of slab
Itotal = moment of inertia of slab and wall together
378
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use Concepts slab analysis plots for cross-section design values in PT structures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because design strips and design sections
provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects by A. Bommer; PTI Journal,
January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
The most common use of self-equilibrium analyses is to ensure that a load path in Concept is consistent with a load path in a
lateral analysis performed by a separate program.
If a lateral analysis of a building (perhaps using RAM Frame) is performed, and that analysis considers the slab to be part of
the lateral load path, the slab - including the slab-column connections - needs to be designed to resist the forces and moments
determined in the lateral analysis. This design can be performed using a self-equilibrium analysis. The forces/reactions from
all of the supports (above and below the slab) onto the slab are considered as loads to the slab, any forces directly applied to
the slab (such as a story-force in a seismic analysis) are also included.
The result of this self-equilibrium analysis is a slab load path that is fully consistent with the lateral analysis of the entire
building. The distribution of forces (and the displacements) within the slab may not match those in the building lateral
analysis, but the distribution of slab forces in Concept is almost always more accurate than those predicted in the fullbuilding analysis.
Other Uses
While there are other potential uses of the self-equilibrium analysis, they are rare and not covered in this manual.
To have Concept analyze a loading using a self-equilibrium analysis, the loading's analysis type must be changed to Lateral
SE (lateral self equilibrium). The loading analysis type can be changed in the loading window. See Changing Analysis on
page 31 of Chapter 10, Specifying Loadings.
Note: The term Lateral SE is used instead of Self Equilibrium to remind users that this analysis type is primarily
intended for lateral loadings.
RAM Concept
379
Chapter 50
Defining the Loads
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the loads applied
must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium Concept will apply restraints to the slab to ensure that
equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the Calc Log.
Note: See Importing a database on page 45 of Chapter 14, Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are not known
before the analysis.
50.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details
Floating Stiffness Matrix
If you use self-equilibrium loadings, Concept creates an internal floating stiffness matrix in addition to the regular stiffness
matrix. The floating stiffness matrix considers the slab, but not the supports above or below the slab. Concept also adds some
minimal supports to the matrix to make it stable.
Minimal Supports
The minimal supports that Concept adds to the floating stiffness matrix are located at real support locations, but not at every
real support location. Typically, Concept adds three supports to provide full stability, but not to provide any restraint.
Note: Concept gives a warning if there are not at least two support locations where minimal supports can be added.
The motivation for adding the minimal supports at the same location as real supports is that these locations are likely to be
locations where self-equilibrium loads are applied, so any reactions at these locations can typically be considered as
corrections to the self-equilibrium loads.
Punching Check Reactions
Punching checks consider the loads applied at the punching check location in their reaction calculations. Punching checks
are the only support that have reactions from self-equilibrium analyses.
Displacements
Concept reports all displacements for self-equilibrium loadings as zero. Self-equilibrium loadings have no effect on the
displacements calculated for load combinations or rule sets.
Pattern Loading
Pattern loading can be used in a self-equilibrium analysis, but it should almost never be used. When used, all patterns should
contain a self-equilibrium set of loads.
Note: For an example, see Example 39-1 on page 201 of Chapter 39, Frequently Asked Questions.
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the design centroid. This direction is also referred to as Vertical
Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in the positive-s region applies to the structure in
the negative-s region.
A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as a design section drawn from point A to point B
except that the following two forces will have opposite signs:
Vz (vertical shear on the s-face)
Mz (moment about the z axis)
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core will be the entire
section.
4 The cores x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroids x and y coordinates.
5 You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 31, Using the
381
Chapter 50
xx% DL Balanced
xx% DL + RLL Balanced
The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that are not reflected).
The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for the balanced loadings and the dead and live
loadings.
For a cantilever span, the effective load is:
w = 2M L
where:
M = moment at first cross section
L = clear span
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
w = 8M L
where
M = (M1 + M2)/2 - M3
M1 = moment at first cross section
M2 = moment at last cross section
M3 = moment at cross section closest to midway between first and
last cross sections
L = clear span
The percentage is defined as:
% = -100 Wb/Wl
where
Wb = effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings
Wl = effective load due to load combination under consideration
(DL or DL + RLL)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an undefined balance load
percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The difference are
due to:
diversion of PT effects
clear span vs total span
moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, DL is based on the dead loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
382
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
In the calculations, RLL is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (parking) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer) + Live
(unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
50.8.6 Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to
Sign Change. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces for every loading
and load pattern:
1. Standard Integration - this is as described in Calculating the forces on the cross section on page 381.
2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of moment (or shear)
with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross
section.
The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances:
Standard Integration - all values always considered.
Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
When the Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option is selected, the design forces are always more
conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross section
forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to the conservatism of
the option.
RAM Concept
383
Chapter 50
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all loads of the loading with no patterns considered.
These results consists of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the Standard
context results for the Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations
Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of loading standard results using the standard load
factors. These results consist of the results on the Slab tab, the Standard context results on the Reaction tab and the
Standard context results for the Strip tab.
Note: Standard results also include all of the results for items other than design strip segments, design sections and punching
checks. Items such as slab bending moments, column reactions and soil reactions are included in the standard (nonenveloped) results.
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
50.9.2 Envelope results
Envelope results are kept for only 3 object types - design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Envelope
results fully consider pattern loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors).
For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces are calculated, and there are six envelope result
sets kept:
Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M)
Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M)
Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V)
Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V)
Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P)
Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: Min refers to the minimum signed value, not the minimum absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept:
Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction)
Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction)
Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction)
Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction)
Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction)
Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for the full loading and the results of all of the pattern
loadings (considering the pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which occur simultaneously with
minimum and maximum values of certain resultants.
384
RAM Concept
Chapter 50
For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be compared, and the pattern result with the largest
bending moment would become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections Max M results might be
determined by other patterns.
If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to the standard results.
Envelope Results - Load Combinations
Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the permutations of standard and alternate load
factors multiplied by all envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and envelope type, the chosen
load factors are those that create the most extreme envelope.
In mathematical terms:
There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns.
These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load combinations, but the result of the RAM
Concepts calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations that use the rule
set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously with the most extreme
envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab except for
those with the Standard context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as the standard envelope,
but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concepts enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be possible,
however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in the envelopes may be
critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning) and/or additional load combinations
(without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single load combination) to ensure that the force set of
concern is considered in the design.
RAM Concept
385
Chapter 50
386
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
RAM Concept
387
Chapter 51
300
Fp(strain)
300
200
Fpu
Fpy
100
0.005
0.00
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
strain
0.03
0.035
0.04
388
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
fps = fse + u Ep cu(dp/c 1)(L1/L2) 0.80fpu
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
fse = effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement
Ep = elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement
cu = failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003)
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength
L = span under consideration
L1 = sum of lengths of loaded spans
L2 = total length of tendon between anchorages
u = K(dp/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and 1.5 for midspan loading
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons
It can be shown that:
p cu ( d p c 1 )
where
p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
With this substitution (and the one for u) the equation becomes:
fps = fse + K(dp/L) Ep p (L1/L2) 0.80fpu
L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L1 as it is unlikely for two spans to simultaneously have
large inelastic deformations. This simplifies the equation further to:
fps = fse + Ep (Kdp /L2) p 0.80fpu
It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kdp /L2) is a strain reduction factor that accounts for the distribution of the
localized strain over the length of the tendon. The numerator is a consideration of the length of the yielding (high strain)
region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length over which this strain is distributed.
RAM Concept
389
Chapter 51
pse = strain in tendon at effective prestress level
p = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1
flimit = limit stress as defined by the effective code
For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of p used in the ACI equations, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is
used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp used in the AS equations, RAM Concept
assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for
both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
Ec = Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain)
A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from parabolic to linear, is calculated:
0 = 2 (0.85 fc)/ Ec
For c < 0 (tension)
fc = 0
For 0 < c < 0 (parabolic range)
fc = 0.85 fc [2(c/0) (c/0)2]
For c 0
(plastic range)
fc = 0.85 fc
4000
3000
Fc(strain)
0.85fc
2000
1000
0
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.004
strain
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
RAM Concept
391
Chapter 51
392
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Bransons formula. If there are axial forces, this formulation is
a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Bransons formula.
We call the value (fcr/fa)4 Bransons Stress Ratio. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
Note that you will more commonly see Bransons formula used with a power of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is appropriate
when a peak moment in a span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire span. The power of 4 is
appropriate for determining a local effective moment of inertia using local section forces [Branson, Dan E., Instantaneous
and Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced Concrete Beams, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama
Highway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
393
Chapter 51
Cg = the gross section curvature
Deflection Multiplier =
Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the structure will
become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce ecr.
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral.
394
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
( c + ( sb 2 ) )
where:
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement centroid
sb = spacing of reinforcement
For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that:
sc = 2 d *
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to a
maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded reinforcement.
The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as:
w c = 2 c d *
(d* h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that:
d* =
RAM Concept
395
Chapter 51
w = s i
where:
ci = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement i centroid
si = length along on concrete tension face allocated to reinforcement i
w = width of concrete tension face
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered minimizes
the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar equivalent. Unbonded and
external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to the cross section are ignored also.
RAM Concept
Chapter 51
To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic bending moment:
MD = 1.2 ML + MH = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 (MP + MH) + MH
Simplifying:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +(PP + PH)/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH
It is common and usually conservative to assume that PH is zero:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +PP/A) S 1.2 MP 0.2 MH
It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2 MH, giving the final design moment equation:
MD = 1.2 (fcr + PP/A) S 1.2 MP
397
Chapter 51
Wood, R. H., The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance with a Pre-Determined Field of Moments, Concrete, vol. 2,
pp. 69-76, February 1968.
Armer, G. S. T., Discussion, Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 319-320, August 1968.
398
RAM Concept
Chapter 52
52.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design strip
segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live (Reducible) Loading
than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
52.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not affect the
loading analysis. The analysis results that Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live load reduction.
Note: Remember that Concept only reduces live load on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
Note: See Viewing live load reduction results on page 151 for more information.
399
Chapter 52
Multiple
Columns
Punching Checks
Figure 52-2 Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would typically deem the influence area to be 2400
square feet.
400
RAM Concept
Chapter 52
Figure 52-3 Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
RAM Concept
401
Chapter 52
Figure 52-5 Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 52-6 Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
402
RAM Concept
Chapter 52
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
RAM Concept
403
Chapter 52
Note: Eurocode 1 actually defines an application factor not a reduction factor (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
404
RAM Concept
Chapter 52
RAM Concept
405
Chapter 52
406
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
53 Reinforcement Notes
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept
utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement
development lengths and lays out and details
reinforcement.
RAM Concept
407
Chapter 53
408
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
RAM Concept
Figure 53-3 Effective development at any point along a bar. (This does not
apply to AS3600 - see Figure 53-4)
409
Chapter 53
= reinforcement location factor
concrete below is taken as the depth from the rebar
center to the bottom of the concrete section
1.3 for concrete below > 12 inches
1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches
= coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar)
less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
1200d
-----------------bfc
The following factors are used to modify this basic length:
Bar yield strength factor = fy / 60 where fy is in ksi
(12.5.3.1)
Figure 53-4 Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for AS3600 ONLY)
Chapter 53
fsy = yield stress of bar
Ab = cross sectional area of reinforcing bar
2a + db = twice the vertical distance from the
nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used
or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are not
provided, the development lengths will need to be specified
manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this.
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
applied:
coating factor
fy db
The resulting equation is: l d = ----------------------------------- m 4 f cu
where:
where:
RAM Concept
411
Chapter 53
For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be
increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for any
bar with fy > 250 N/mm2.
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
applied:
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3
1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is
assumed to be 2db for bars with yield stress less than or
equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4db for bars with yield stress
greater than 250 N/mm2.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is
8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with 26.2.2.1
(1).
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook
is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (2).
l bd = 1 2 3 4 5 l b, rqd l b, min
where:
1 = bar shape factor from Table 8.1
2 = concrete factor from Table 8.1
3 = 1.0 (tranverse reinforcement not considered)
4 = 1.0 (transverse reinforcement not considered)
5 = 1.0 (transverse pressure not considered)
l b, min max { 0.3l b, rqd, 10, 100mm }
For beams, the minimum cover cd is assumed to be 25 mm.
As such, the minimum clear spacing between bars should
be detailed as 50 mm.
For slabs, the minimum cover cd for straight bars is
calculated as the minimum vertical clear cover to the
nearest concrete surface. For bent bars the cover cd is
calculated as 5 times the bar diameter. The minimum clear
spacing between bent bars should thus be detailed as 10
times the bar diameter.
Anchorage length for bent bars is determined using Figure
8.1(a) and using the minimum bend diameters from Table
8.1N(a)
coating factor
1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
1.0 for uncoated bars
412
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
Concept considers all of the spans' and all of the design
sections' designs when laying out program reinforcement.
Concept's layout algorithm uses 5 steps as follows:
413
Chapter 53
The preliminary layout of bars is trimmed by the slab shape
determined in step 3. Additionally, the required end cover
(as defined in the Calc Options window) may shorten a bar
further. This trimming may convert a single bar into
multiple bars, or may eliminate a bar altogether.
Figure 53-5 Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identical except for the respective location of the elevation reference point.
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
At locations of complicated geometry (such as multiple
beams in a single span design, or curved beams), Concept
may not be able to create an appropriate representation of
the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The
correct design quantities can always be viewed in the
Section Design plots of the Design Status layer.
Reinforcement layer
Note that:
RAM Concept
415
Chapter 53
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code
produces more reinforcement.
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect.
416
RAM Concept
Chapter 53
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect.
Figure 53-14 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span detailing]
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
RAM Concept
417
Chapter 53
418
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
419
Chapter 54
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
420
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
54.2.6 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load combination is used
by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 0.25 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
421
Chapter 54
422
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind portion of the Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L
+ 1.28S + 1.6W load combination has been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The need for this change is described
in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to the wind loads, the wind factors may
be reduced in accordance with the original ACI 318-99 combinations.
423
Chapter 54
When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values:
Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses
Ec = value for all other conditions
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = w c
1.5
Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
RAM Concept
425
Chapter 54
54.5.3 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
54.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
426
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
54.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.3
18.8.1
One-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
Two-Way Slab
10.3.3
18.8.1
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
One-Way Slab
(none)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
RAM Concept
427
Chapter 54
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2.
The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
428
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
RAM Concept
429
Chapter 54
Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented.
Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is
waived per 11.5.5.1a.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion on page 430 for further requirements.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining
effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
431
Chapter 54
432
RAM Concept
Chapter 54
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 fc times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum fc for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf 1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The twice that required criterion is not checked.
RAM Concept
433
Chapter 54
434
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
435
Chapter 55
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
437
Chapter 55
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
Dead Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
439
Chapter 55
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.6 (std & alt)
440
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
Dead Loading: 1.2 (std) & 0.9 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
1.5
Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
RAM Concept
441
Chapter 55
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
442
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement
requirement (see Service on page 444).
Section 18.8.2 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
RAM Concept
443
Chapter 55
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
55.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
444
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
55.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
55.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
RAM Concept
445
Chapter 55
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
446
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount
necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary
to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the
cross section.
RAM Concept
447
Chapter 55
448
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
At
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ------ p h f yv
s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
RAM Concept
449
Chapter 55
Class T
Class C
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calculation
Gross section
Cracked section
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
No limit
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of fs
for crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Gross section
Table 55-7
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
450
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
maxf
3
s
s
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
RAM Concept
451
Chapter 55
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded Posttensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 388).
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross
section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning
Stress-Strain Curves Program Implementation on page 389).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.
452
RAM Concept
Chapter 55
RAM Concept
453
Chapter 55
454
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
455
Chapter 56
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
457
Chapter 56
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
459
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
461
Chapter 56
Snow Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
1.5
Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
462
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
463
Chapter 56
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab
7.12
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
464
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
56.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
RAM Concept
465
Chapter 56
56.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
56.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
466
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
RAM Concept
467
Chapter 56
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
468
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
469
Chapter 56
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
At
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ------ p h f yv
s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
470
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
Class T
Class C
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calculation
Gross section
Cracked section
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
No limit
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of fs
for crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Gross section
Table 56-7
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
471
Chapter 56
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
2
--- numberofducts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
472
RAM Concept
Chapter 56
RAM Concept
473
Chapter 56
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
orthogonal to the cross section.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
474
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
475
Chapter 57
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
477
Chapter 57
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
479
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
481
Chapter 57
Snow Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
1.5
Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
482
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
RAM Concept
483
Chapter 57
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement
requirement (see Service on page 485).
Section 18.8.2 is is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
One-Way Slab
7.12
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
484
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
57.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
RAM Concept
485
Chapter 57
57.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.5 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
57.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
486
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
RAM Concept
487
Chapter 57
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
488
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
489
Chapter 57
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.5.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.5.1(c).
The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.5.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
At
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ------ p h f yv
s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.5.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.5.1 and 11.5.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
490
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
Class T
Class C
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calculation
Gross section
Cracked section
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
No limit
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of fs
for crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Gross section
Table 57-7
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
491
Chapter 57
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
2
--- numberofducts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
492
RAM Concept
Chapter 57
RAM Concept
493
Chapter 57
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
orthogonal to the cross section.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
494
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
495
Chapter 58
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
497
Chapter 58
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Ultimate Wind Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)
RAM Concept
499
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
501
Chapter 58
Snow Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
1.5
Ec = wc
1.5
33 f ci
33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
502
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
RAM Concept
503
Chapter 58
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement
requirement (see Service on page 505).
Section 18.8.2 is is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
One-Way Slab
7.12
Two-Way Slab
7.12
18.8.2 (bonded)
18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
504
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
58.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC
PT Class U
PT Class T
PT Class C
Beam
10.6.4
One-Way Slab
10.6.4
Two-Way Slab
(none)
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.4.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.4.2a
RAM Concept
505
Chapter 58
58.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 11.5 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
58.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.3.5
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.3.5
(none)
506
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In critical span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the critical span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the elevated slab and mat foundation minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.
RAM Concept
507
Chapter 58
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
508
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
509
Chapter 58
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section core.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.5.3.6.
in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.5.1(c).
The minimum f c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.5.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h 2A 0 ) cot
By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
At
A 1 f y1 = 5 fc A cp ------ p h f yv
s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.5.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.5.5.1 and 11.5.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
510
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
Class T
Class C
Transition between
uncracked and cracked
Cracked
Section properties
for stress calculation
Gross section
Cracked section
7.5 fc < ft 12 fc
No limit
Crack control
No requirement
No requirement
10.6.4 /
18.4.4
Computation of fs
for crack control
Not applicable
Not applicable
Gross section
Table 58-7
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
511
Chapter 58
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
2
--- numberofducts
3
This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
512
RAM Concept
Chapter 58
RAM Concept
513
Chapter 58
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
orthogonal to the cross section.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
514
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
59 AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concepts implementation of AS 3600-2001.
The six sections outline the following:
Default loadings
Default load combinations
Live load factors
Material behaviors
How code rules are selected for cross section design
Implementation of code rules
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
515
Chapter 59
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
516
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
517
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt)
1.5
1.5
0.043 f cmi
0.043 f cm
Where
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing
fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
RAM Concept
519
Chapter 59
520
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
RAM Concept
521
Chapter 59
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
8.1.4.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
8.1.4.2
59.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
8.6.2
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
9.4.2
RC
PT
Beam
8.6.1 (portions)
(none)
One-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
Two-Way Slab
9.4.1 (portions)
(none)
59.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
522
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 8.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
59.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
8.1.3
8.1.3
One-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
Two-Way Slab
8.1.3
8.1.3
523
Chapter 59
The tendon stress is never exceeds fpy.
The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
59.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach on page 387 for a description of RAM Concepts
strain compatibility design.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
User Es values are used
For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is used appropriately.
RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility on page 523 for applying ductility requirements.
If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design
strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the
required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely
cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads
(by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
The standard strength reduction factor () of 0.8 is used.
524
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section calculation
suggested in the code.
The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp.
If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending
moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress
limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
RAM Concept
525
Chapter 59
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A) or Table
8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar
diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of
half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of
spaces may be used.
For the max service design:
Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
RAM Concept
527
Chapter 59
Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are
converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion
is based upon area.
Section (c) This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(A) or Table 9.4.1(B),
whichever is larger.
The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 9.4.1(A).
The bar spacing for Table 9.4.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components
for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter
on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the
maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (d) This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.
Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
RAM Concept
Chapter 59
For corrosive or very corrosive environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(6.0 2.5
cp)(Ag)/1000
For non-PT design strips and design sections, cp is taken as zero.
RAM Concept
529
Chapter 59
530
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
531
Chapter 60
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
532
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
60.2.9 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4. The load
factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) and 1.0 (alt)
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
RAM Concept
533
Chapter 60
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
534
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
0.67fcu / 1.5
For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.3.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to be 0.6 f cu .
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A comparison of
the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
RAM Concept
535
Chapter 60
Concept implementation
Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
536
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
fpu Aps = sum of all the individual tendons' fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps.
fcu bd = minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the centroid of
the vector component tendon area
For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is: k = 5d / L
where
L = length of the unbonded tendon.
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and zone of inelasticity of ten times this length [see BS 8110
code text that accompanies equation 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine d and b. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the
more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative
moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the
tendon as when the tendon is on the wrong side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to
the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
The tendon length l in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to assume multiple simultaneous inelastic zones.
RAM Concept
537
Chapter 60
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT - bonded
tendons
PT - unbonded
tendons
Beam
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4
4.12.2
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4,
4.12.2,
TR43/6.10.6
One-Way Slab
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
4.12.2
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7,
4.12.2,
TR43 / 6.10.6
Two-Way Slab
3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.7
TR43 / 6.10.6
TR43 / 6.10.6
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
538
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
60.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Class 2
Very Corrosive: Class 1
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab
3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
60.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
RAM Concept
539
Chapter 60
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
3.4.4
4.3.7
3.4.5
4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13*
4.3.9*
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
60.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab
3.2.2.1
4.2.3.1
60.5.7 Accident
Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are performed if appropriate.
Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
540
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, m = 1.3 and for reinforcement, m =
1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the 0.95fyv (Amendment 1 and 2) or 0.87fyv (Amendment 3) values
are changed to 1.0fyv.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
One-Way Slab
(none)
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced m )
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
RAM Concept
541
Chapter 60
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span
under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment
simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely
cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by
selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
542
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Note: Assume in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should instead be .
60.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs
Included code sections - 3.5.4
Excluded code sections - none
See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 546 for discussion.
Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3
Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are rectangular and subject to flexure.
Reinforcement is provided such that:
2
A s f y ( 0.0013 ) ( 460N mm )A c
2
A s f y ( 0.0013 ) ( 500N mm )A c
RAM Concept
(Amendment 1 and 2)
(Amendment 3)
543
Chapter 60
A s ( 0.0013 )A c
For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned reinforcement is ignored.
For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the
cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered to be equivalent to
un-tensioned 460 N/mm2 reinforcement for Amendment 1 and 2, and 500 N/mm2 reinforcement for Amendment 3, and will
reduce the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector
components of their reinforcement areas considered toward the requirement. This interpretation is somewhat more
conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 546 for discussion.
In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code section is applied even though it is not required as
crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or
are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section
consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for
spacing calculations.
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections on page 546 for discussion.
In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d. This code
section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are
within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
544
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section
consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for
spacing calculations.
RAM Concept
545
Chapter 60
Tendons Member
Type
Class
Reinforcement calculation
Bonded
Beam
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Beam
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
0.36 f cu
0.36 f cu
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
One-way
4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded
Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
0.36 f cu
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
3 / 0.1 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Beam
3 / 0.2 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
0.36 f cu
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
3 / 0.1 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded One-way
3 / 0.2 mm 0
Tables 4.2 /
4.3*
TR 43,
6.10.5
Unbonded Two-way
All
TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,
6.10.5
TR 43 Table 2
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for grouted post-tensioned tendons and a
0.1mm crack width are used.
60.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections
For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being with bonded tendons if the majority of the tendons
in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as with bonded
tendons are considered as being with unbonded tendons. A cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being
with unbonded tendons.
546
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs, this implementation is somewhat different from
a literal code interpretation as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded tendons in a cross section. It also
may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a cross section with bonded tendons, which the code does not require.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stresses and the peak stress
reported may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
547
Chapter 60
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section
centroid are limited to 0.4fci.
For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.24fci in the support
region and 0.33fci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported
may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states that additional reinforcement should be provided
if necessary. This is interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds 0.36 f ci (since this stress
is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress may exceed this limit if the additional reinforcement is provided.
60.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure
Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial)
Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4
See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design
section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in
many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves on page 387 for tendon stressstrain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility.
548
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross
section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 388).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.
Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
Vc Implementation
M < Mo
Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bvh
M > Mo
and no tension on
the tension face *
Vc = (stress)bvh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in tension zone)
Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
dt is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
RAM Concept
549
Chapter 60
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of As
used in the calculation of vc.
bv is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds
of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from bv.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term, with (Aps + As) used in place of As. See section 3.4.5
for detail of the implementation of this table.
When unbonded tendons are used, the value of vc is reduced by a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8.
Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements ignored. The web thickness used in the
calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of multiple webs. In such
cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one web.
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
550
RAM Concept
Chapter 60
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance
loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= msc
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and
tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht ] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin) ]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
However, a cr =
2
s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c )
2
s b + c min = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c )
2
s b = ( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min
sb =
( s c h t 2s c c min ) ( 3h t 2s c ) c min
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to Determination
of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 546 for discussion.
For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and 3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note that Table
3.27 in TR 43 refers to the 1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition). This interpretation is
somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support
regions as follows:
RAM Concept
551
Chapter 60
As = 0.00075Ac.
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2.
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
552
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for
further description.
RAM Concept
553
Chapter 61
Balance Loading: 1.15 (std & alt) (this includes a 15% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
554
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
555
Chapter 61
556
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
storage loads on a Live (Storage) layer if you would like their effects to be reducible for beams (only), and on a Live
(Unreducible) layer if you do not want their effects to be reduced for any member.
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of
2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of IS 456 Fig 21. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be
different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
RAM Concept
557
Chapter 61
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A comparison of the
stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Fig. 28 Provision
Concept Implementation
Since Concepts crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
558
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
RAM Concept
559
Chapter 61
centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross
section at the tendon elevation.
RC
PT
Beam
26.5.1.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
One-Way Slab
26.5.2.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
Two-Way Slab
26.5.2.1 (456)
18.6.3.3 (1343)
31.7.1 (456)
31.7.1 (456)
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These
values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement
reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
61.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the Type of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Type 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Type 3 (0.1 mm crack)
RAM Concept
561
Chapter 61
Corrosive: Type 2
Very Corrosive: Type 1
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS
456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width design is performed for
all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1 members as by definition they have no
tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for additional information.
61.5.5 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
562
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
38 (456)
22.1 (1343)
40 (456)
22.4 (1343)
41 (456)
22.5 (1343)
Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
61.5.6 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
One-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
Two-Way Slab
37.1.1d (456)
21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
Table 61-5 Ductility rule mapping
RAM Concept
563
Chapter 61
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
0.0035
The neutral axis depth is further limited to ----------------------------- in accordance with 38.1 item f;
0.0055 + -----ym
where y = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension.
565
Chapter 61
For one-way shear in slabs, the design shear strength is increased by the depth factor in accordance with 40.2.1.1
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of
the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is
calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100As / bd is
taken as 0.15).
fy is limited to 415 N/mm2.
Stirrups are provided per 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, and 40.4
In beams, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Maximum allowable shear stress is determined in accordance with Table 20. Slabs use 1/2 the values in Table 20 in
accordance with 40.2.3.1.
Maximum spacing of stirrups along the span is the smaller of 0.75 d and 300 mm.
The spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Enhanced shear strength close to supports is not considered.
Beams of varying depth are not considered.
Net axial compression is considered per 40.2.2 if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
566
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Using this final equation, Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the bar diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
RAM Concept
567
Chapter 61
568
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves General Theory on page 388).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.
Vc Implementation
M < Mo
Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bh
M > Mo
and no tension on
the tension face *
Vc = (stress)bh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in tension zone)
Aps = 0 (none in tension zone)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
d is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
dt is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of Ap
used in the calculation of vc.
b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of
the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to determine Ap used
in Table 6.
RAM Concept
569
Chapter 61
When calculating fpe/fpu, fpe is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of prestressing steel.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6.
For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate.
Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456 40.2.3.1.
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3.
Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when Vu > Vc.
The web thickness used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is
made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one
web.
Note: There is a typographical error in the code section 22.5.4.2 for the calculation of Ve1. The term in the numerator should
be ec, not e as shown in the code. Also, equation for Tc in section 22.5.4.1 is typographically incorrect. Refer to publications
Design of Prestressed Concrete Beams Subjected to Combined Bending, Shear, and Torsion by Rangan and Hall, ACI
Journal March 1975 and Strength of Rectangular Prestressed Concrete Beams in Combined Torsion, Bending, and Shear
by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal April 1973 for details.
570
RAM Concept
Chapter 61
For type 2 members, the temporary service loads adjustment is not taken.
For bonded and unbonded cross sections, Type 3 hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from Table 8 as
Grouted post-tensioned tendons.
The values in Table 8 are multiplied by the Depth Factors in Fig. 6 as necessary.
For each section, two limit stresses are calculated. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no supplemental
un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The supplemental untensioned reinforcement is calculated in accordance with the Note under Table 8. Cross sections with unbonded tendons
(see Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 571) are classified as other members when
calculating supplemental reinforcement.
Note: When calculating supplemental reinforcement per the Note under Table 8, the additional reinforcement is calculated
as a percentage of the cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone as is done in BS 8110. This is different than a
literal reading of the IS 1343 code.
571
Chapter 61
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress
limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
The average of the top and bottom concrete stress in the cracked section is limited to the direct compressive stress limit of
0.8 times the value from Fig. 8.
572
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
RAM Concept
573
Chapter 62
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.5 Characteristic Service Snow LC: D + 0L + S
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
574
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.7 Frequent Service Snow LC: D + 2L + 0.2S
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.8 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.2 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.8 Quasi-Permanent Service LC: D + 2L
This load combination is intended for checking the quasi-permanent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.8 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.9 Ultimate LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L + 0.75S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table NA.A1.2 (B)
of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.35 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
RAM Concept
575
Chapter 62
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.10 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L + 1.5S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table NA.A1.2 (B)
of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.11 Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2
(B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. It conservatively applies a factor of 1.5 to all live loads, even though the
Code technically permits 0 to be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Note: Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
576
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
62.2.12 Accident LC
This load combination is intended for checking the accident limit state. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.14 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + 0L + S + 0.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers snow as
the leading action and applies 0 to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.5 (std) & -0.5 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
RAM Concept
577
Chapter 62
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.16 Frequent Service Wind LC: D + 2L + 0.2W
This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state with wind.
The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.3 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.6 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.8 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.2 (std) & -0.2 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.17 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.50L + 0.75S + 0.75W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table NA.A1.2 (B)
of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.35 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
578
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Wind-Service Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.18 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S + 0.75W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2
(B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind and snow loads are treated as accompanying actions and all live
loads are treated as the leading actions. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.19 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.50L + 1.5S + 0.75W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2
(B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind and live loads are treated as accompanying actions and snow
loads are treated as the leading actions. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.20 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5 0L + 0.75S + 1.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table NA.A1.2
(B) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads
are treated as accompanying actions. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)
RAM Concept
579
Chapter 62
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 0.75 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Wind-Service Loading: 1.5 (std) & -1.5 (alt)
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
62.2.21 Equilibrium Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W
This load combination is intended for checking the equilibrium limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10) in Table NA.A1.2
(A) of UK National Annex to BS EN 1990:2002. The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads
are assumed to be favourable. This combination is only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0
Dead Loading: 0.9
Wind-Service Loading: 1.5
62.3 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:
Domestic, residential, and office (Category A and B) loads on a Live (Reducible) layer
Assembly (Category C and D) loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Car park loads (Category F) on a Live (Parking) layer
Storage loads(Category E) on a Live (Storage) layer.
Roof loads (Category H) on a Live (Roof) layer.
Note: Live load reduction will conservatively not be considered on Assembly loads in Category C and D. However it is
necessary to assign the loads to the Live (Unreducible) type to get the appropriate factors in the load combinations.
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses
Ec = value for all other conditions
When the EC2 code equation is selected the following values are used:
Eci = 22,000[(fcki + 8)/10]0.3 MPa (fcki in MPa)
Ec = 22,000[(fck + 8)/10]0.3 MPa (fck in MPa)
Where
fcki = characteristic cylinder strength at stressing
fck = 28 day characteristic cylinder strength
For calculations based on the concrete section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress
or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are paraboliclinear curves as detailed in clause 3.1.7. The transition strain is at c2.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.85fcki .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85fck.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.85fck / 1.5.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of cu2. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of Figure 3.3. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be
different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
581
Chapter 62
Eps = Eps
Fpy = Fpy / m
Fpu = Fpu / m
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
The placement of the reinforcement is based on the min. reinforcement location selection for the design strip segment
or design section:
Elevated Slab Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan.
Mat Foundation Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan.
Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set
(reinforcement may be required on both faces).
Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
9.2.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
One-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
Two-Way Slab
9.3.1.1
TR-43 5.8.8
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least one load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 33 of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
RAM Concept
583
Chapter 62
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
5.10.2.2 /
TR-43 5.8.2
One-Way Slab
(none)
5.10.2.2 /
TR-43 5.8.2
Two-Way Slab
(none)
5.10.2.2 /
TR-43 5.8.2
584
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table:
Design System
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
Beam
7.2(2)
7.2(2)
7.2(5)1
7.2(5)
7.2(5)1
7.2(2)
7.2(2)
7.2(5)
7.2(5)1
7.2(2)
7.2(2)
7.2(5)1
7.2(5)
7.2(5)1
TR-43 5.8.12
(Table 4)
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
TR-43 5.8.12
(Table 4)
7.2(5)1
TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
Table 62-3 Characteristic service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.2(5) is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
62.5.5 Frequent Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of
members as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4
Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3
RAM Concept
585
Chapter 62
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table:
Design System
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
Beam
(none)
7.31
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.72
7.31
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.12
TR-43 5.8.72
7.31
TR-43 5.8.12
(Table 5)
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
(none)
(none)
TR-43 5.8.12
(Table 5)
TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
Table 62-4 Frequent service rule mapping
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where stress design is requested.
62.5.6 Quasi-Permanent Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of
members as follows:
Protected: X0, XC1
Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4
Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table:
Design System
RC
Bonded PT
Unbonded PT
Beam
7.3
(none)
7.31
One-Way Slab
7.3
(none)
7.31
Two-Way Slab
7.3
(none)
7.31
Note: 1- for PT members 7.3 is only performed where crack width design is requested.
62.5.7 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
586
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
6.1
6.1/TR-43 5.8.5
6.2
6.2/TR-43 5.9
6.3
6.3
6.1
6.1/TR-43 5.8.5
6.2
6.2/TR-43 5.9
6.3
6.3
6.1
6.1/TR-43 5.8.5
6.2
6.2/TR-43 5.9
6.3
6.3
One-Way Slab
Two-Way Slab
62.5.8 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
5.5
5.5
One-Way Slab
5.5
5.5
Two-Way Slab
5.5
5.5
Table 62-7
62.5.9 Accident
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
Reduced m factors are used in the strength calculations. For reinforcement m = 1.0.
Reinforcement location is determined by the Min. Reinforcement Location setting.
RAM Concept
587
Chapter 62
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
9.10
9.10
One-Way Slab
9.10
9.10
Two-Way Slab
9.10
9.10
Table 62-8
588
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span
under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment
simultaneously with the given axial force.
At T, L and Z beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely
cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by
selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
RAM Concepts design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an overreinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
A tension design is performed for longitudinal torsion tension required by the torsion model. This design assumes the design
yield stress of the reinforcement and the calculated reinforcement is in addition to other requirements for flexure. Tension
demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected value of the compression chord on that face due to flexure.
589
Chapter 62
Links are provided in accordance with 6.2.3 and 9.2.2. The angle is calculated as the minimum value that can satisfy the
requirement that VEd VRd,max , within the range specified in 6.2.3(2).
Minimum density of shear reinforcement is determined in accordance with 9.2.2(5).
Maximum shear reinforcement spacing along the span is determined by 9.2.2(6).
The shear reinforcement spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
Net axial force is considered if the Consider Net Axial checkbox is checked.
590
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
kt =
tension stress in un-tensioned reinforcement from a cracked section analysis, or maximum differential
bonded tendon stress from tendon stress level at zero strain in the concrete at the same level
0.6 for frequent service design
0.4 for quasi-permanent service design
fct,eff = fctm
p,eff = (As + 12 Ap)/Ac,eff
As =
Ap =
RAM Concept
591
Chapter 62
Ac,eff = area of concrete within depth hc,eff
hc,eff = minimum of 2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, or h/2
d=
1 =
[ (s/p)]
s =
p =
1.6Ap
e =
Es/Ecm
3.4
c=
k1 =
k2 =
k4 =
0.425
eq =
If the bonded reinforcement within hc,eff is less than or equal to 5(c+ eq /2), RAM Concept uses equation 7.11 for sr,max. If
a larger spacing exists, RAM Concept uses a crack spacing of 1.3(h-x) in accordance with equation 7.14. RAM Concept
always assumes the maximum crack spacing is 1.3(h-x).
For bonded PT systems, decompression is checked for exposure class XC2, XC3, and XC4 for the quasi-permanent load
combination and for exposure class XD and XS for the frequent load combination. For the decompression checks, a check is
made that the entire bonded tendon lies within 25mm of concrete in compression, using cracked section properties. For the
purposes of this check the tendon is assumed to be round with a diameter equal to the width specified in the material
properties.
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
See Code Minimum Reinforcement on page 582 for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will be added to.
For RC beams, post-tensioning is ignored.
For PT beams, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the
cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For AsFy requirements, tendon
(fpy fse) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector
components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements.
For unbonded PT beams, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than 1.15
times the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based upon the Min. Reinforcement
Pattern selected in the design strip segment or design section.
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are
considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations on page 396 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment
(note that a 1.15 factor is used in EC2).
The cracking stress is taken as fctm,fl in accordance with EC2 clause 3.1.8. For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes,
the maximum fck for the cross section is used.
RAM Concept
593
Chapter 62
594
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
For unbonded beam and one way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in
accordance with TR43 5.8.7. TR43 does not provide an absolute tensile stress limit for exceeding the Table 3 values. As
such, RAM Concept uses the Table 3 values as absolute limits and therefore does not permit enhancing the stresses by
adding un-tensioned reinforcement. The recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either
Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43.
For two way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in accordance with
TR43 5.8.7. Table 4 or Table 5 values are used depending upon whether or not full panel width strips are used (average
stresses) or column/middle strips are used (design strip stresses). In determination of using with bonded reinforcement
limits the average spacing of the bonded reinforcement on the tension face is checked (using bonded tendons in the tension
zone). If the bonded reinforcement spacing limit is greater than 500 mm at the time when the limits are being determined,
the without bonded reinforcement limits are used. Since the reinforcement in the service design is left in the cross section
from force envelope to envelope, it is possible that an envelope will use the without bonded reinforcement limits while the
subsequent envelope will use with bonded reinforcement limits due to the reinforcement added in the previous envelope.
Where full panel width strips are used, the recommended design strip property setting PT Service Design Type is either
Stress or Stress and Crack Width. Crack Width only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. In the case where
column/middle strips are used the recommended setting is Stress or Stress and Crack Width or Crack Width as TR43
explicitly permits the stress limits in Table 5 to be exceeded where explicit crack width checks are performed.
Tension limit
without
supplemental
reinforcement
Absolute
Tension
Limit
Supplemental
Reinforcement
Calculation
Load
Combination
0.2
Hypothetical
Crack Width
(used to
determine
stress limits)
(mm)
0.2
1.65fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
Frequent1,2
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2
0.2
1.65fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
Frequent1,2,
Quasi-
XD or XS
0.2
0.1
1.35fctm
0.3fck
5.8.1
Unbonded Beam,
One Way Slab
All
0.3
1.35fctm
5.8.7
X0, XC1
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Permanent1
Characteristic2,
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Frequent1
Characteristic2,
XD or XS
0.2
0(support)
0.9fctm(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Permanent3
Characteristic2,
X0, XC1
0.2
1.2fctm
5.8.7
Frequent1,3
Frequent1,2
XC2,
XC3,
XC4
0.2
0(support)
1.2fctm(span)
0(support)
1.2fctm(span)
1.2fctm
5.8.7
XD or XS
0.2
1.2fctm
5.8.7
All
0.3
0(support)
1.2fctm(span)
0(support)
0.3fctm(span)
0.9fctm
5.8.7
Member Type
Exposure
Class
Code
Design
Crack
Width
(mm)
Bonded Beam,
One Way Slab
X0, XC1
Unbonded Two
Way Slab, Full
Panel Width
RAM Concept
Permanent3
Frequent1,2,3
Frequent2,
Quasi-
Frequent1,
Quasi-
Frequent1,2,
QuasiPermanent3
Frequent1,2,3
Characteristic2,
QuasiPermanent1
595
Chapter 62
Unbonded Two
Way Slab,
Column/Middle
Strips
All
0.3
0(support)
0.4fctm(span)
1.2fctm
5.8.7
Frequent2,
QuasiPermanent1
596
RAM Concept
Chapter 62
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is
specified.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: There are no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement requirements for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are
primarily bonded. Refer to Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections on page 594 for discussion.
For primarily unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 9.2.1.1 or 9.3.1.1 are applied as
appropriate.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs in column strips, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions as follows:
As = 0.00075Act.
Act = sum of cross sectional area of column strip and adjacent middle strips(generated from the same span segment)
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2.
For design sections, this criterion is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked. The requirement that this reinforcement be concentrated between lines that
are 1.5 times the slab depth is not checked.
User defined reinforcement and bonded tendons that are at an angle to the cross section will only have the component
perpendicular to the cross section considered.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs, minimum reinforcement consisting of un-tensioned reinforcement and bonded tendons is
provided as follows:
As = 0.001Ac
Ac = area of cross section
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2.
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The spacing of this reinforcement is limited to 500 mm. Bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side
of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as
equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes their plan
locations are ignored.
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section
consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for
spacing calculations.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
RAM Concept
597
Chapter 62
598
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
599
Chapter 63
the appropriate importance factor for the normal category. For importance categories other than normal, the
corresponding load combinations will need to be generated manually.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a Zero-Tension analysis. Since a
load combination using a Zero-Tension analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. In some cases, the assumption that all gravity loads act in
the same direction have been used to keep the number of load combinations to a minimum. See Chapter 11, Specifying Load
Combinations for further description.
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
600
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
601
Chapter 63
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
602
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
RAM Concept
603
Chapter 63
604
1.5
33 f c
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing (MPa)
fc = 28 day cylinder strength (MPa)
c = density of concrete (kg/m3)
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in Concrete Stress-Strain Curves on page 390 of
Chapter 51, Section Design Notes.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.0035. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
RAM Concept
605
Chapter 63
Tension Face Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set
(reinforcement may be required on both faces).
Top Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
Bottom Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
None No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.1
18.7
One-Way Slab
7.8
18.7
Two-Way Slab
7.8
(none)
Concepts User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations on page 35of Chapter 11, Specifying Load Combinations for further
information.
606
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
One-Way Slab
(none)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
Note: 18.3.1.1(c) is not considered. 18.3.1.1(b) is considered in all cases for tension.
63.5.4 Service
Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
The design strip segment or design section property Environment is used to determine the exposure category of
members as follows:
Protected: Partial PT/RC, interior exposure
Normal: Partial PT/RC, exterior exposure
Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(c)
Very Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(d)
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC
Partial PT
Full PT
18.3.2(c)
Full PT
18.3.2(d)
Beam
10.6.1
18.8.1, 18.8.3
18.8.1,
18.3.2(c)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
One-Way Slab
10.6.1
18.8.1, 18.8.3
18.8.1,
18.3.2(c)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.8.1,
18.3.2(d)
RAM Concept
607
Chapter 63
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
(none)
18.3.2a
One-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.2a
Two-Way Slab
(none)
18.3.2a
63.5.6 Strength
Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
See Torsion Considerations on page 397 for how torsion is implemented.
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
One-Way Slab
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
Two-Way Slab
10.1, 11.3*
18.6, 11.3*
Note: * - 11.3 is applied only if beam torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
63.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System
RC
PT
Beam
10.5.2
(none)
One-Way Slab
10.5.2
(none)
Two-Way Slab
10.5.2
(none)
608
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
609
Chapter 63
For sections with multiple values of fc, the fc of each concrete block is used appropriately.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount
necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary
to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the
cross section.
The shear and torsion tension forces are included in the flexural/axial design. In slabs, more longitudinal reinforcement than
is required might be provided in order to eliminate the use of tranverse reinforcement. See Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion
Tension on page 611 for additional information.
For sections declared as post-tensioned, bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatiblity (see detailed
description Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains on page 388. Unbonded tendon
stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain
Curves Program Implementation on page 389). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under
consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
610
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Post-tensioning is ignored.
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount
of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.
RAM Concept
611
Chapter 63
For sections with multiple values of f c, the minimum f c is used.
In beams, transverse reinforcement consists of transverse reinforcement perpendicular to the axis of the member.
General equation 11-4 is used for all cases but vertical component of effective prestress force (Vp) is conservatively not
included in the calculations.
In the determination of the effective concrete web width, the width of the shear core is considered, less the widths specified
in accordance with 11.2.10.2.
Lightweight concrete is considered.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in accordance with 11.2.8 and equation 11-1.
The effective depth for shear is taken as the greater of 0.9d or 0.72h, where d is the distance from the extreme compression
fiber to the resultant tension force.
The maximum spacing limits of 11.3.8.1 are applied.
If beam torsion design is selected, see Section 11.3 Torsion Design on page 612
612
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Torsional and shear longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining
effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
RAM Concept
613
Chapter 63
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
Member Type
Tensile Stress
Tensile Stress
0.5 f c
> 0.5 f c
Type of tendon
Type of tendon
Bonded
Unbonded
Bonded
Unbonded
Beam
0.004A
0.003A
0.005A
One-way slab
0.003A
0.002A
0.004A
Two-way negative
moment regions
0.006hln
0.0045hln
0.0075hln
Two-way postitive
moment regions >
0.004A
0.003A
0.005A
0.2 f c
Two-way positive
moment regions <
0.2 f c
Table 63-7
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
614
RAM Concept
Chapter 63
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars and bonded tendon ducts that meets the criteria. A non-integral number
of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with
stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars and bonded tendon ducts. An additional bar is not
added to make the width start and end with a bar.
fs in bonded tendons is calculated as the difference between the stress in the bonded tendon due to the specified load moment
and the decompression moment.
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than necessary in two circumstances:
The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis.
Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
RAM Concept
615
Chapter 63
616
RAM Concept
Chapter 64
RAM Concept
617
Chapter 64
Each load history step represents an applied load combination for a specified duration of time. Each load history step is
solved in sequence, taking into consideration the effects from all previous load history steps. For instantaneous load steps the
duration can be specified as zero. The specified sequence of load steps makes up the entire load history. The total age at the
end of each load history step is reported as a read only value in the table.
In order to calculate load history results, span segments and design sections must be specified such that each finite element
with significant stress is covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section or design section oriented appropriately for
the element stress. For one-way slabs, this could be achieved by defining span segments in the spanning direction only. For
two-way slabs, span segments should be specified in orthogonal directions to cover the entire slab. Since the load history
deflection detailed calculations are carried out on the cross sections and subsequently used to adjust element stiffness,
omission of span segments or design sections in highly stressed regions will result in an inaccurate and potentially
unconservative prediction of deflections.
RAM Concepts load history deflection calculations do not directly consider the effects from specified patterns, from live
load reduction, or from alternate load factors.
Since the load history calculations can be time consuming, they are performed separately from other calculations in RAM
Concept. They are invoked using the Calc Load History Deflections (
) command. The button will only be active if load
steps are specified in the Load History criteria page and if the current load history results are out of date.
Results
The results for each load history step are available in the load history folder on the report tree. The results stored on each
load history step represent the state of the structure at the end of the load history step. Additional load history steps can be
added at any desired interval in order to calcuate results at any particular age of interest.
RAM Concept
Chapter 64
5 Re-analyze the structure with the adjusted element stiffnesses and check for convergence. Convergence is measured by the
deflection difference between two iterations as measured at a key node.
6 Repeat 1-5 for each load history step until convergence.
64.3.2 Creep
Creep strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total creep as a function of
time. The creep model presented in ACI 209R-92 is utilized in RAM Concepts load history calculations. The creep value
input in the Calc Options page should represent the final ultimate creep value and should take into account concrete mix,
environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by regional building codes. The ACI model is
only used to predict the percentage of total creep as a function of time. The modification factor la to account for initial load
application times other than 7 days is automatically included in RAM Concepts load history calculations and should not be
incorporated into the input creep value.
Creep strains are assumed to be a linear factor of the initial load induced elastic strain for a particular load. In order to
consider loads that are applied at different times, the assumption is made that creep strains of like or opposing signs can be
superimposed. These assumptions are likely reasonable for the normal range of service loads.
An ageing coefficient is used as a modifier of creep to account for the rate of application loading, its effect on the creep
and the variation of concrete strength over the time period. While the rigorous calculation of the coefficient is rather
involved, this value can normally be taken as 0.8 with little loss in accuracy.
64.3.3 Shrinkage
Shrinkage strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the percentage of total shrinkage as a
function of time. The shrinkage model presented in ACI 209R-92 for moist curing is utilized in RAM Concepts load history
calculations. The shrinkage value input in the Calc Options page should represent the final ultimate shrinkage and should
take into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by regional
building codes. The ACI model is only used to predict the percentage of total shrinkage as a function of time. The
modification factor cp to account for moist curing durations other than 7 days is automatically included in RAM Concepts
load history calculations and should not be incorporated into the input shrinkage value.
64.3.4 Cracking
When a flexural load or shrinkage causes the applied tensile stresses to exceed the cracking stress, the stress is relieved at
that location and a redistribution of stress occurs with a resulting increase in cross section curvature. As load increases, the
RAM Concept
619
Chapter 64
number of cracks also increases. In the cross section calculations, at the crack locations the concrete is assumed to carry no
tension. In the regions between the cracks the bonded tension reinforcement transfers tension back into the concrete. This
phenomenon is normally referred to as tension stiffening. In a partially cracked concrete member the mean curvature over a
region lies between the uncracked curvature and the curvature at the crack locations. A number of models exist for
predicting the tension stiffening behavior. The tension stiffening model presented in the Eurocode 2-2004 is utilized in RAM
Concepts load history calculations utilizing a long term factor. See Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio on
page 393 for additional information. The modulus of rupture for the design Code in use is used for the concrete flexural
tension strength in the tension stiffening equation.
In general, external restraint to shrinkage shortening can increase the cracking in the floor, thus increasing deflections.
Failure to account for this effect can result in underestimation of deflection values. A crude means of accounting for this is
through the Shrinkage Restraint % value in Calc Options. This percentage is multiplied by the input free shrinkage strain
value (as a function of time) to determine a hypothetical tension strain. This hypothetical tension strain is combined with the
load induced strains which is then used to determine a hypothetical tension stress from the concrete stress strain curve. This
hypothetical tension stress is used in the tension stiffening calculation. These stresses are not used in the cross section
curvature calculations. As such, increasing this percentage will generally increase the amount of cracking predicted and used
in the tension stiffening interpolation, but will not affect the calculated curvatures directly.
620
RAM Concept
Chapter 64
64.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term Deflection results
plotted for the strip?
Because the methodology is entirely different, the results between the load history calculations will sometimes differ from
the long-term deflections plotted on the strip. It is common for the load history deflections to be larger or smaller than the
strip based long-term deflections. Some of the primary differences are outlined here.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be larger than strip based long-term deflections are:
Redistribution of forces is considered, which can lead to a more realistic prediction of cracking in the structure. Cracking
in one region can lead to increased forces in adjacent regions (either laterally or along the span) which can in turn lead to
additional cracking throughout the structure.
Stresses induced in the uncracked concrete due to shrinkage being restrained by the reinforcement or by specifying a
Shrinkage Restraint % are considered in the cracking and tension stiffening calculations.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be smaller than strip based long-term deflections are:
Compression reinforcement is always considered, whether the cross section is actually cracked or not. Uncracked transformed properties are used where the cross section is not cracked.
Load history is taken into consideration. If the maximum load is not sustained through the duration of the calculation, the
load history calculations will take this into consideration.
RAM Concept
621
Chapter 64
Additionally, deflection calculations can be somewhat sensitive to finite element mesh size. For best results using load
history calculations, at least 12 elements per bay are recommended with a cross section spacing approximately equal to the
resulting element size.
622
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
Any loads that are applied within the critical section shape could be excluded from the punching reaction since they do not
contribute to the forces passing through the critical section. Concept calculates the punching reaction by summing the
column above and below reactions with any point loads applied within the column shape. The column shape is used for this
RAM Concept
623
Chapter 65
calculation (instead of the critical section shape) as it guarantees a single set of punching reactions for each punching check.
Line and area loads are not considered in this summation.
Punching Reactions for Lateral SE Loads
Loads of analysis type Lateral SE are appropriately included in the punching reactions. These loads are typically applied at
the column/wall locations and normally consist of at least an applied out of plane concentrated force with a set of
orthogonally applied moments. These forces typically represent the total joint forces applied from the supports to the slab for
the given lateral loading. The correct punching reaction for this type of loading is simply the loading itself. Since Concept
internally removes the column and wall supports in the Lateral SE loading analysis, the resulting punching reaction will be
the summation of any loads applied within the column shape.
Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress
Some building codes allow the vertical component of prestress to be considered in the punching calculations. This is
normally accomplished by adding the contribution of the vertical prestress to the capacity at the critical section, or by
subtracting the vertical prestress component from the punching reaction. Concept can approximate this effect using the Calc
Option Include Tendon Component in Punch Check Reaction. If this option is selected, after the tendons have been
converted into equivalent concentrated balance loads Concept will modify (normally reduce) the punching reaction by any
concentrated forces located within the column shape.
Note: Due to the fact that the tendons are idealized as concentrated balance forces as well as the fact that Concept uses the
column shape instead of the critical section shape, this calculation is approximate. When using this option, it is extremely
important to make sure that the Concept model tendon plan locations and profile shapes match the final design and field
placement in order to obtain accurate results. As such, this option should be used with extreme caution.
65.2.2 Step 2: Determine the column critical sections
Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone radius specified to find likely failure locations. Concepts
critical section calculations correctly consider slab thicknesses, but make simplifying assumptions about the elevations of
the slab regions. In certain situations this can result in improper location of critical sections.
In areas of varying thickness, Concept's punching calculations assume that the thickenings protrude toward the load
application. For example, in an elevated slab shear caps are assumed to be located below the slab, and in a mat/raft
foundation plinths are assumed to be located above the mat/raft. If this is not the case, Concept may not locate the critical
sections appropriately. See the example in Figure 65-1.
Analyzed correctly
The location at some distance (usually a function of effective depth d) from the face of the column is considered to be a
likely failure area. The location at some distance from a change in section thickness is also considered to be a likely failure
area.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or hole found within the punching zone radius
creates a sector or zone that offers no resistance to punching.
624
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then Concept investigates a number of critical sections including
sections that connect to edges or openings (which provide no punching resistance) in attempts to find the most critical
section.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then the location of the critical sections is not affected by the holes, but
any part of a section intersecting a hole will be considered to provide no punching resistance. It is recommended that Ignore
Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments do not produce desired critical sections.
Figure 65-2 Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical sections. The method
that Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find them. You should always visually inspect
the locations of the critical sections that Concept has checked to see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by
a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan).
stressed sections from being reinforced. Please refer to the specific Code section for a detailed description of how each handles
this check.
2 Install Initial Rails - some initial rails are installed with an arbitrary length. The initial rails are installed to satisfy the
maximum transverse spacing requirement of the active Code at the face of the column or support.
3 Extend the Rails - the rails are iteratively extended until all cutoff section stresses are within the Code-allowable stresses
for unreinforced sections. A cutoff section is one at the Code specified offset distance outside the zone reinforced with SSR.
RAM Concept
625
Chapter 65
4 Check the calculated/designed stud spacing resulting from the current rail layout. If the spacing doesn't work, rails are
added and the design is restarted at step 2.
Note: In punch checks containing slab edges, it is possible for Concept to extend the rails to a distance within the punch
check radius, but points projected perpendicular to the slab edge would be outside the punch check radius. In this case
Concept may not find the most critical cutoff sections. This can normally be rectified by increasing the punch check radius.
The Engineer should inspect cutoff sections for appropriateness and adjust punch check properties as necessary.
65.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results
Finally, the results are summarized. Direct summarizing of SSR designs is not possible for a number of reasons (for
example, two independent designs might have rails of different lengths, and therefore different depths which would dictate a
different stud spacing). Therefore, if more than one design rule specifies punching shear design, the force envelopes from
each design rule are combined into a single force envelope, then a summary design is carried out for this combined force
envelope as outlined above.
For each resulting critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code allowable stress to determine an unreinforced
stress ratio (USR). If the column contains SSR reinforcement, Concept also reports a reinforced strength ratio (RSR), which
is the punching demand over the strengthened capacity. If one or more of the potentially critical sections does not fit the
standard conditions, then the column is tagged with a Nonstandard Section label in which case the engineer should review
the applicability of the code design equations to the critical section labeled nonstandard.
65.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support, first stud
spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties.
Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects > Punch
Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by Concept but can be easily determined from the geometry. Generally,
the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural member's outer surfaces (while
observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). Concept's strength calculations assume that each individual shear
stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud
rail. A punching design may have shear stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
For the Ancon Shearfix system design, the input covers are used to calculate a physical rail depth and used to generate the
Ancon part numbers shown in the punching report.
626
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
Concept assigns the connections as follows:
if the total angle of the voids is greater than 180 degrees: corner
if the total angle of the voids is less than 180, but greater than 90 degrees: edge
otherwise: interior
Due to the possible complex geometries, Concept will not always assign the appropriate connection type, so we advise you
to use discretion when using the Auto setting.
The connection type assigned by Concept can be viewed on a plan by checking the Column Condition box under
Punching checks on any plan that displays Rule Set Design Layers, or the Design Status Layer.
For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is conservative to select an option that has more slab edges
(i.e., if a connection appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to select corner for
connection type).
The ACI/CSA punching shear analysis and design approach uses the ACI 318 or CSA A23.3 provisions for the basis of the
implementation. A critical section is defined at d/2 from the periphery of the area of application of force. These critical
sections are arranged to minimize bod. For slab edges located within the punching check, additional critical sections will be
generated by projecting perpendicular lines from the original section to the slab edges. Additionally, a set of sections will be
generated for each basic slab shape (column, drop cap, etc.). Maximum overhang (from the originating shape) can be limited
as a function of d as specified by the user. For ACI by default no limit is used. For CSA A23.3 the limit is 1.0d in accordance
with clause 13.3.3.3.
To calculate the section stresses, an elastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the critical section centroid is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a linearly
varying stress distribution on the section. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. v for each section is calculated about the principal axes for that section. For column sections, the
length/width ratios used to calculate v are unmodified. For cutoff sections, the length/width ratios are modified in
accordance with ACI 421.1R99.
RAM Concept
627
Chapter 65
Ixx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the
critical section, in4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
right-hand rule for sign convention, kip-in
Mux =
column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
Muy =
column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
vu =
Vu =
axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive, kips
fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
= angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
Equations for calculation of shear stress
The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A similar formulation can be found in the article
Design of Stud Shear Reinforcement for Slabs by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, May-June 1990. The values of
vx and vy are always calculated about the principal axes of the critical section.
628
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
vu =
a)
(x
)[
y po int y vx M ux Iyy + vy M uy I xy
Vu
+
2
bo d
I xx I yy I xy
)[
x vy M uy Ixx + vx M ux I xy
po int
I xx I yy I xy
b) M ux = M ox + Vu ( ycol y )
c) M uy = M oy Vu ( xcol x)
d) I xx =
e) I =
yy
f) I =
xy
xx
sides =1
yy
sides =1
xy
sides =1
3
g) I = dL (sin 2 ) + Ld ( y y ) 2
xx
side
12
3
h) I = dL (cos 2 ) + Ld ( x x ) 2
yy
side
12
3
i) I = dL (sin cos ) + Ld ( x x )( y y )
xy
side
side
12
j)
v = 1
1
2 b1
1+
3 b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section. If the
moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the more familiar:
vu =
Vu vx M ux ( y po int y ) vy M uy ( x po int x)
+
bo d
Ix
Iy
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI-318 (11-33), (11-34), (11-35), or
(11-36).
Equation 11-33 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column
gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
RAM Concept
629
Chapter 65
Equation 11-34 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio bo/d. This equation
generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 11-35 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones, 4 f c .
Equation 11-36 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the
following criterion:
1 The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging
the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being
used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations
would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 125 psi.
2 fc shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input greater than 5000 psi, a maximum fc of 5000 psi
will be used in prestressed punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be calculated using equation 11-36.
3 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 11-33 through 11-35 are applied.
For the ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 standards, lightweight concrete is considered.
Note: These equation numbers are from the ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-05 standards.
ACI 318 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses vu on the column sections are limited to a maximum of v n , where vn = 6 fc per ACI 31805 11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to vn = 8 fc by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 of a higher limit for vn. The
higher limit is also applied to all sections in the ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 standards. Sections with unreinforced stresses
larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
ACI 318 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
(11-2)
where
v c = 2 fc
or
v c = 3 fc
vs = Av fyvdaveRail / (bosd)
Note: This equation has been extended from ACI equation 11-15 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
Av = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
vs,min = 2 fc
630
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
ACI 318 Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 equation 3.12. This spacing is rounded
down to the nearest 1/8 in. for US units or 5 mm for metric units.
The maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, and ACI 318-05 is 0.5 d, but can be increased to 0.75 d
when v u is less than or equal to 6 fc by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 for a higher limit for spacing. The
maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 is 0.75 d when v u is less than or equal to 6 fc and 0.5
d otherwise.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
appendix A.2 and ACI 318-02 11.12.3.3. Tangential spacing requirements are not checked at locations other than the face of
the column/support.
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of 2 fc per ACI 318-02 11.12.6.2(b).
For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, v is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
Appendix B.
CSA A23.3 equations for calculation of allowable shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from CSA A23.3 (13-5), (13-6), (13-7), or (185).
Equation 13-5 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column
gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
Equation 13-6 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio bo/d. This equation
generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 13-7 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones.
Equation 18-5 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the
following criterion:
1 The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 0.8 MPa. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging
the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being
used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 0.8 MPa in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations
would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 0.8 MPa.
2 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 13-5 through 13-7 are applied.
CSA A23.3 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses on the column sections are limited to a maximum of 0.75 c fc per CSA A23.3 13.3.8.2.
CSA A23.3 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
(13.3.7.3)
where
v c = 0.28 c fc
(13.3.8.3)
and
RAM Concept
631
Chapter 65
vs = sAvs fyvdaveRail / (bosd)
(13-11)
Note: This equation has been extended from CSA equation 13-11 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
Avs = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
CSA A23.3 Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6. This spacing is rounded down to the
nearest 5 mm.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.5d or 0.75d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d. Tangential spacing requirements are not
checked at locations other than the face of the column/support.
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of 0.19 c fc per CSA A23.3
13.3.7.4. For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, v is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R99 Appendix B.
The minimum rail length is 2 d in accordance with 13.3.7.4.
The critical section for punching shear is assumed to be at dom/2 from the face of the loaded area or support, where dom
represents the mean value of do, averaged around the critical perimeter. Based on the derivation of the code equations, dom is
not meant to include the thickness of beams. Concept uses a heuristic method for determining the critical section thickness in
regions of differing slab/beam thicknesses around the punching check. The critical section thicknesses can be inspected by
turning them on using visible objects.
The AS 3600 model for punching shear assumes that the shear force V* is distributed evenly around the critical section
creating a uniform average shear stress of v = V*/udom. The unbalanced moment, Mv* is resisted by a 3-component
mechanism:
1 Difference in yield moments at the front and back faces of the slab strips.
2 Eccentricity of the uniform shear stresses v from the centroid of the support or load.
3 Torsional moment on the side faces (torsion strips).
In the model, the torsional moment in #3 is resolved into a maximum shear stress and added to the uniform average shear
stress v. The proportion of Mv* contributing to the torsional moment in #3 is actually variable, but is assumed to be constant
to simplify the model. The value of Mv* is taken at the centre of the column/support.
Design Equations
The resulting shear capacity Vuo where Mv* is zero (as well as on slab strip faces) is calculated per AS 3600 clause 9.2.3a:
V uo = ud om ( f cv + 0.3 cp )
Rearranged to view in terms of limiting stress, this equation becomes:
V
------------- f cv + 0.3 cp
ud om
632
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
Where Mv* is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.2.4a when there are no
closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams:
V uo
V u = ------------------------------------------ uM v
1 + -----------------------
8V ad om
This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of Mv* and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This equation can
be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
M v
V
--------------- + ------------- f cv + 0.3 cp
2
ud
om
8ad om
The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion strips.
Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum closed ties in
accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.2.4b. Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum ties required by this clause,
which must be calculated and included by the Engineer.
When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.2.4b is used:
1.2V uo
V u = --------------------------------------- uM v
1.0 + ----------------
2V a 2
This expression can also be re-arranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
M v
V
---------------------- + -------------------- f cv + 0.3 cp
2
2.4a d om 1.2ud om
In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is possible for
the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without.
Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
Calculation of Maximum and Allowable Shear Stress and Corresponding Stress Ratio
2
f cv = 0.17 1 + ----- f c 0.34 f c
and cp is the average prestress in the punching check region. If cp results in tension it reduces the allowable stress. The
reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by = 0.7 .
For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated.
2 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
3 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the s-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
The absolute maximum shear stress from above is reported as the maximum unreinforced shear stress for that force
envelope. The unreinforced stress ratio for each force envelope is the maximum unreinforced stress/allowable stress.
RAM Concept
633
Chapter 65
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
The SSR is used to resist direct shear stresses, but not torsion stresses. Where SSR is provided the punching resistance is
calculated as follows:
1 The following operations are performed individually on each face:
2 A minimum number of rails are installed based upon a maximum transverse rail spacing of 2dom. The rails are installed
at the allowable maximum spacing. The length of each rail is a minimum of 2.5d.
3 The number of strips used for strength is calculated, up to a total of 4 (2 slab and 2 torsion strips). This is accomplished by
determining how many faces contain parts of the critical section. If there is no part of the critical section on a particular face,
this face will not be used for strength design but will get rails placed, if possible, using the maximum transverse spacing
requirement.
4 The perimeter length of the face is calculated both as a slab strip and a torsion strip. The length of the torsion strip is simply
the appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the slab strip is calculated as the length remaining after any torsion
strip lengths have been deducted. If the torsion strip is broken up with holes/openings, it is possible that the slab strip length
will be less than or equal to zero. In this event no design will be reported and the status will be reported as Failed.
5 The average effective depth of the slabs containing the existing rails is calculated.
6 The number of additional rails required is calculated and added, if necessary, and step 4 and 5 are repeated until a satis-
634
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
The maximum punching shear force which can be transferred to the column is taken as the smaller of these two values of
V u :
where
V V u
= 0.7
Maximum Reinforced Strength
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.35 d. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 5 mm for metric units (or 1/8
inch for US units).
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. In seismic applications, the Engineer can limit the typical spacing to a smaller
value by specifying the typical stud spacing directly.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided as follows:
In the slab strip,
0.35bs
A vs = ---------------f vy
In the torsion strip,
0.35as
A vs = ---------------f vy
When SSR reinforcement is required, the minimum quantity of reinforcement is required on all strength strips.
The punching shear analysis and design approach uses the EC2 provisions for the basis of the implementation. Some
condition specific EC2 provisions were generalized using CEB-FIP 90. The implementation also implements suggestions in
TR-43 regarding treatment of precompression in the shear strength equations.
A control perimeter (u1) is defined at 2d from the periphery of area of application of force. This control perimeter is
constructed so as to minimize its length. The corners of the perimeter are rounded.
RAM Concept
635
Chapter 65
For slab edges located within the punching check, additional control perimeters will be generated by projecting
perpendicular lines from the original control perimeter to the slab edges. Additionally, control perimeters will be generated
for each basic slab shape, cap, etc. This could result in a number of basic control perimeters.
To calculate the perimeter stresses, a plastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the control perimeter is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a complete stress
distribution on the perimeter. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. The k factor in EC2 equation 6.39 is applied to the unbalanced moment after the column forces are
transformed to the plastic neutral axis of the control perimeter.
EC2 clause 6.4.3(3) requires the calculation of a factor on the basic control perimeter. The same factor is then applied
to all subsequent perimeter calculations. This simplification is made due to the complexity in the plastic section calculations.
Concept does not make this assumption, but instead calculates and applies an appropriate factor for each perimeter
calculated. This is in accordance with the approach for the cutoff section in CEB-FIP 90.
Before any calculations are performed, the following manipulations are carried out on the reactions at the column center:
1 The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid.
2 k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes.
3 The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors.
4 The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
b + d
b + c
area a
area c
a + c
area d
a + d
area b
The remainder of the calculations are carried out about the elastic principal axes of the control perimeter. Since a plastic
stress distribution is used, if the punching area of the control perimeter on each side of the elastic neutral axes is not equal,
the magnitudes must vary to maintain vertical equilibrium. This is handled by using multiplication factors representing the
ratio of stress on one side of the principal axis over the stress on the other side. These factors are represented in the following
form:
Area
x = --------------aArea b
Area
y = --------------cArea d
636
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as:
b = x a
Equation 1
d = y c
Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section:
Mox = unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
Moy = unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
d = effective depth at location in critical section
These terms can be envisioned as plastic section moduli and each term has units of cubic length. Due to the interaction of
in the above equations and the equations below, these values are only valid for the axes about which they are calculated.
Equation 3 and 4 then become:
RAM Concept
637
Chapter 65
The stress in any given quadrant of the critical section is then solved for as:
v Rd ,c = C Rd ,c k ( 100 1 f ck ) + k 1 cp v min + k 1 cp
(6.47)
where
0.18
C Rd ,c = ---------c
200
k = 1 + --------- 2.0d
d
d in mm
1 =
relates to bonded tension steel in y and z directions (this value is input directly by the user as a
ly + lz 0.02
(6.52)
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield strength of the
SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to make reductions to the effective
yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made by specifying a reduced yield stress in the SSR
Systems on the Materials page.
Limitation of Punching Stress at the Perimeter of the Column or Loaded Area
At the perimeter of the column face the maximum shear stress is limited to:
vEd = vRd,max
638
(6.53)
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
where
v Ed = V Ed ( u 0 d )
vRd,max = 0.5 v fcd
= maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u1
v = 0.6[1 - fck/250] fck in N/mm2
fcd = design value of concrete compressive strength
u0 = length of column or loaded area periphery
u0 is further limited as follows:
Edge columns: u0 < 6d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for irregular
situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the Engineer as necessary.
Corner columns: u0 < 3d
Miscellaneous Provisions
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost perimeter of
shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter.
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d.
The maximum transverse rail spacing is 1.5 d within the first control perimeter and 2.0 d outside the first control perimeter.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided in accordance with EC2 equation 9.11:
A sw ,m in ( 0.08 f ck s r s t ) 1.5f yk
where st is assumed to be < 2d (Final rail layout should be confirmed/adjusted to be in agreement with this assumption)
Note: EC2 has special provisions for column bases. These provisions are not implemented in Concept (the provisions above
are applied to all punching checks). For slabs without prestress, this will always be conservative. For slabs with prestress,
the Engineer will need to evaluate the validity of the results.
RAM Concept
639
Chapter 65
Figure 65-4 Positive moment reactions derived from the right-hand rule sign convention.
Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and moments that would need
to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the columns were removed. This can be
envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with the reported reactions applied at the column
centroid. Refer to Figure 65-5 for clarification.
640
RAM Concept
Chapter 65
far from the column will be considered in determining the potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller critical
section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid elevation of the top reinforcement. In general this
is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the top bar). This distance is
subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the d distance.
Angle - The plan angle about which punching reactions are enveloped. For some codes this also defines the angle about
which the punching calculations are performed. In general, this should either be set to the angle of the column or (if the
column is at a slab edge) the angle of the slab edge. The Align Punch Check Axis with Rectangular Columns checkbox
can be used to automatically set the angle.
Edge/Hole Treatment - See Figure 65-2.
Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to About Connection Type on page 626.
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by Concept may be smaller than that calculated by 2D frame programs,
because Concept uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching zone. This punching zone average will
reflect a lower effective prestress in column capitals and other thickened areas.
RAM Concept
641
Chapter 65
642
RAM Concept